Patent Publication Number: US-9843917-B2

Title: Protocols for facilitating charge-authorized connectivity in wireless communications

Description:
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     The present application is related to and/or claims the benefit of the earliest available effective filing date(s) from the following listed application(s) (the “Priority Applications”), if any, listed below (e.g., claims earliest available priority dates for other than provisional patent applications or claims benefits under 35 USC §119(e) for provisional patent applications, for any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Priority Application(s)). In addition, the present application is related to the “Related Applications,” if any, listed below. 
     PRIORITY APPLICATIONS 
     For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/839,536, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,693,214 B2, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 15 Mar. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date. 
     For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,658, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date. 
     For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,687, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date. 
     For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,713, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,713,013 B2,, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date. 
     For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,738, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,635,605 B2, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date. 
     RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/931,147, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,706,382 B2, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed on even date herewith, is related to the present application. 
     U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/931,236, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,781,554 B2, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed on even date herewith, is related to the present application. 
     The United States Patent Office (USPTO) has published a notice to the effect that the USPTO&#39;s computer programs require that patent applicants reference both a serial number and indicate whether an application is a continuation, continuation-in-part, or divisional of a parent application. Stephen G. Kunin,  Benefit of Prior - Filed Application , USPTO Official Gazette Mar. 18, 2003. The USPTO further has provided forms for the Application Data Sheet which allow automatic loading of bibliographic data but which require identification of each application as a continuation, continuation-in-part, or divisional of a parent application. The present Applicant Entity (hereinafter “Applicant”) has provided above a specific reference to the application(s) from which priority is being claimed as recited by statute. Applicant understands that the statute is unambiguous in its specific reference language and does not require either a serial number or any characterization, such as “continuation” or “continuation-in-part,” for claiming priority to U.S. patent applications. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Applicant understands that the USPTO&#39;s computer programs have certain data entry requirements, and hence Applicant has provided designation(s) of a relationship between the present application and its parent application(s) as set forth above and in any ADS filed in this application, but expressly points out that such designation(s) are not to be construed in any way as any type of commentary and/or admission as to whether or not the present application contains any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application(s). 
     If the listings of applications provided above are inconsistent with the listings provided via an ADS, it is the intent of the Applicant to claim priority to each application that appears in the Priority Applications section of the ADS and to each application that appears in the Priority Applications section of this application. 
     All subject matter of the Priority Applications and the Related Applications and of any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Priority Applications and the Related Applications, including any priority claims, is incorporated herein by reference to the extent such subject matter is not inconsistent herewith. 
     If an Application Data Sheet (ADS) has been filed on the filing date of this application, it is incorporated by reference herein. Any applications claimed on the ADS for priority under 35 U.S.C. §§119, 120, 121, or 365(c), and any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of such applications, are also incorporated by reference, including any priority claims made in those applications and any material incorporated by reference, to the extent such subject matter is not inconsistent herewith. 
     Under the auspices of various alleged “rules” implementing the America Invents Act (AIA), the United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) is purporting to require that an Attorney for a Client make various legal and/or factual statements/commentaries/admissions (e.g. Concerning any “Statement under 37 CFR 1.55 or 1.78 for AIA (First Inventor to File) Transition Application”) related to written description/new matter, and/or advise his Client to make such legal and/or factual statements/commentaries/admissions. Attorney expressly points out that the burden of both alleging that an application contains new matter with respect to its parent(s) and establishing a prima facie case of lack of written description under 35 U.S.C. §112, first paragraph lies firmly on the USPTO. Accordingly, and expressly in view of duties owed his client, Attorney further points out that the AIA legislation, while referencing the first to file, does not appear to constitute enabling legislation that would empower the USPTO to compel an Attorney to either make/advise such legal and/or factual statements/commentaries/admissions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Attorney/Applicant understand that the USPTO&#39;s computer programs/personnel have certain data entry requirements, and hence Attorney/Applicant have provided a designation(s) of a relationship between the present application and its parent application(s) as set forth herein and in any ADS filed in this application, but expressly points out that such designation(s) are not to be construed in any way as any type of commentary and/or admission as to whether or not a claim in the present application is supported by a parent application, or whether or not the present application contains any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application(s) in general and/or especially as such might relate to an effective filing date before, on, or after 16 Mar. 2013. 
     Insofar that the Attorney/Applicant may have made certain statements in view of practical data entry requirements of the USPTO should NOT be taken as an admission of any sort. Attorney/Applicant hereby reserves any and all rights to contest/contradict/confirm such statements at a later time. Furthermore, no waiver (legal, factual, or otherwise), implicit or explicit, is hereby intended (e.g., with respect to any statements/admissions made by the Attorney/Applicant in response to the purported requirements of the USPTO related to the relationship between the present application and parent application[s], and/or regarding new matter or alleged new matter relative to the parent application[s]). For example, although not expressly stated and possibly despite a designation of the present application as a continuation-in-part of a parent application, Attorney/Applicant may later assert that the present application or one or more of its claims do not contain any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application[s], or vice versa. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     This disclosure relates to facilitating connectivity in wireless communications. 
     SUMMARY 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and circuitry for obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and circuitry for signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and circuitry for obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly; extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly; and supporting at least the first antenna and the signal processor and the output component all in the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly; circuitry for extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; and circuitry for transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly; extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; and transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly, the wearable assembly including the computing device; extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; and transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure. 
     In addition to the foregoing, various other method and/or system and/or program product aspects are set forth and described in the teachings such as text (e.g., claims and/or detailed description) and/or drawings of the present disclosure. The foregoing is a summary and thus may contain simplifications, generalizations, inclusions, and/or omissions of detail; consequently, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the summary is illustrative only and is NOT intended to be in any way limiting. Other aspects, features, and advantages of the devices and/or processes and/or other subject matter described herein will become apparent in the teachings set forth below. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES 
       For a more complete understanding of embodiments, reference now is made to the following descriptions taken in connection with the accompanying drawings. The use of the same symbols in different drawings typically indicates similar or identical items, unless context dictates otherwise. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments may be utilized, and other changes may be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here. 
         FIG. 1  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented, including a schematic depiction of an apparatus. 
         FIG. 2  comprises a 24-sheet depiction of an environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in which sub-parts are labeled as  FIGS. 2A-2D, 3A-3D, 4A-4D, 5A-5D, 6A-6D, and 7A-7D . 
         FIG. 2A  depicts a 4×6 grid of thumbnails of the 24 respective sub-parts of  FIG. 2 . 
         FIG. 2B  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a user holding a device in one hand and pointing with the other. 
         FIG. 2C  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts one device in a cell-only zone and another device in a wireless local area network (WLAN) zone. 
         FIG. 2D  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts another user device with a wireless linkage to a base transceiver station (BTS), the BTS also having a wireless linkage to at least one of the devices of  FIG. 2C . 
         FIG. 3A  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts another user whose handheld device requests a phone call. 
         FIG. 3B  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a WLAN access point that communicates with devices of  FIGS. 2C and 3A . 
         FIG. 3C  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a switch by which WLAN access points interact with a network. 
         FIG. 3D  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a base station controller (BSC). 
         FIG. 4A  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts an access map server. 
         FIG. 4B  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts another BSC. 
         FIG. 4C  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a mobile switching center (MSC). 
         FIG. 4D  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a subscriber status database. 
         FIG. 5A  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts wireless linkage between an access map server and at least one mobile devices in a “free ride” zone. 
         FIG. 5B  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a BTS in communication with mobile devices. 
         FIG. 5C  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts interfaces by which switches interact with the network. 
         FIG. 5D  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts the network. 
         FIG. 6A  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts device users in a “free ride” zone. 
         FIG. 6B  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts device users in WLAN zone as well as a switch by which WLAN access points interact with the network. 
         FIG. 6C  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts another BTS. 
         FIG. 6D  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts another MSC and BSC. 
         FIG. 7A  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts operational flows. 
         FIG. 7B  comprises a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts other operational flows. 
         FIGS. 7C &amp; 7D  each comprise a portion of  FIG. 2  that depicts a wearable device user. 
         FIG. 41  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented on a city street. 
         FIG. 42  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented between a primary device and a secondary device. 
         FIG. 3  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented among electrical nodes and transistors of an integrated circuit. 
         FIG. 4  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a handheld device. 
         FIG. 5  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC). 
         FIG. 6  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in control logic. 
         FIGS. 7-13  each depict another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic. 
         FIG. 14  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a user interface. 
         FIG. 15  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a stationary device, a vehicle, or a handheld device. 
         FIG. 16  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a supervisor unit. 
         FIG. 17  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a communications network. 
         FIG. 18  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic. 
         FIG. 19  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a device that facilitates interpersonal communications. 
         FIGS. 20-23  each depict an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in one or more data-handling media. 
         FIG. 24  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic. 
         FIG. 25  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic. 
         FIG. 26  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a detection unit. 
         FIG. 27  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 32  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 27 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 28  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 33  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 28 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 29  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 34  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 29 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 30  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 35  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 30 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 31  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 36  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 31 , e.g.). 
         FIGS. 37-40  each depict another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic. 
         FIGS. 43-46  each depict an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in one or more information-handling media. 
         FIGS. 47-50  each depict another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic. 
         FIG. 51  depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic. 
         FIG. 52  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 59  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 52 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 53  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 60  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 53 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 54  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 61  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 54 , e.g.). 
         FIGS. 55 &amp; 56  each depict an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 62  depicts variants of flows presented elsewhere. 
         FIG. 57  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 63  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 57 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 58  depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented. 
         FIG. 64  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to  FIG. 58 , e.g.). 
         FIG. 65  depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process with several optional operations. 
         FIG. 66  depicts variants of earlier-presented flows. 
         FIG. 67  likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows. 
         FIG. 68  likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows. 
         FIG. 69  likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows. 
         FIG. 70  likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION 
     In the following detailed description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, which form a part hereof. In the drawings, similar symbols typically identify similar or identical components or items, unless context dictates otherwise. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments may be utilized, and other changes may be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here. 
     The present application uses formal outline headings for clarity of presentation. However, it is to be understood that the outline headings are for presentation purposes, and that different types of subject matter may be discussed throughout the application (e.g., device(s)/structure(s) may be described under process(es)/operations heading(s) and/or process(es)/operations may be discussed under structure(s)/process(es) headings; and/or descriptions of single topics may span two or more topic headings). Hence, the use of the formal outline headings is not intended to be in any way limiting. 
     Throughout this application, examples and lists are given, with parentheses, the abbreviation “e.g.,” or both. Unless explicitly otherwise stated, these examples and lists are merely exemplary and are non-exhaustive. In most cases, it would be prohibitive to list every example and every combination. Thus, smaller, illustrative lists and examples are used, with focus on imparting understanding of the claim terms rather than limiting the scope of such terms. 
     With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singular terms herein, those having skill in the art can translate from the plural to the singular and/or from the singular to the plural as is appropriate to the context and/or application. The various singular/plural permutations are not expressly set forth herein for sake of clarity. 
     One skilled in the art will recognize that the herein described components (e.g., operations), devices, objects, and the discussion accompanying them are used as examples for the sake of conceptual clarity and that various configuration modifications are contemplated. Consequently, as used herein, the specific exemplars set forth and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, use of any specific exemplar is intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of specific components (e.g., operations), devices, and objects should not be taken limiting. 
     Those having skill in the art will recognize that the state of the art has progressed to the point where there is little distinction left between hardware, software, and/or firmware implementations of aspects of systems; the use of hardware, software, and/or firmware is generally (but not always, in that in certain contexts the choice between hardware and software can become significant) a design choice representing cost vs. efficiency tradeoffs. Those having skill in the art will appreciate that there are various vehicles by which processes and/or systems and/or other technologies described herein can be effected (e.g., hardware, software, and/or firmware), and that the preferred vehicle will vary with the context in which the processes and/or systems and/or other technologies are deployed. For example, if an implementer determines that speed and accuracy are paramount, the implementer may opt for a mainly hardware and/or firmware vehicle; alternatively, if flexibility is paramount, the implementer may opt for a mainly software implementation; or, yet again alternatively, the implementer may opt for some combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware in one or more machines, compositions of matter, and articles of manufacture, limited to patentable subject matter under 35 USC 101. Hence, there are several possible vehicles by which the processes and/or devices and/or other technologies described herein may be effected, none of which is inherently superior to the other in that any vehicle to be utilized is a choice dependent upon the context in which the vehicle will be deployed and the specific concerns (e.g., speed, flexibility, or predictability) of the implementer, any of which may vary. Those skilled in the art will recognize that optical aspects of implementations will typically employ optically-oriented hardware, software, and or firmware. 
     In some implementations described herein, logic and similar implementations may include software or other control structures. Electronic circuitry, for example, may have one or more paths of electrical current constructed and arranged to implement various functions as described herein. In some implementations, one or more media may be configured to bear a device-detectable implementation when such media hold or transmit device detectable instructions operable to perform as described herein. In some variants, for example, implementations may include an update or modification of existing software or firmware, or of gate arrays or programmable hardware, such as by performing a reception of or a transmission of one or more instructions in relation to one or more operations described herein. Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, an implementation may include special-purpose hardware, software, firmware components, and/or general-purpose components executing or otherwise invoking special-purpose components. Specifications or other implementations may be transmitted by one or more instances of tangible transmission media as described herein, optionally by packet transmission or otherwise by passing through distributed media at various times. 
     Alternatively or additionally, implementations may include executing a special-purpose instruction sequence or invoking circuitry for enabling, triggering, coordinating, requesting, or otherwise causing one or more occurrences of virtually any functional operation described herein. In some variants, operational or other logical descriptions herein may be expressed as source code and compiled or otherwise invoked as an executable instruction sequence. In some contexts, for example, implementations may be provided, in whole or in part, by source code, such as C++, or other code sequences. In other implementations, source or other code implementation, using commercially available and/or techniques in the art, may be compiled/implemented/translated/converted into a high-level descriptor language (e.g., initially implementing described technologies in C or C++ programming language and thereafter converting the programming language implementation into a logic-synthesizable language implementation, a hardware description language implementation, a hardware design simulation implementation, and/or other such similar mode(s) of expression). For example, some or all of a logical expression (e.g., computer programming language implementation) may be manifested as a Verilog-type hardware description (e.g., via Hardware Description Language (HDL) and/or Very High Speed Integrated Circuit Hardware Descriptor Language (VHDL)) or other circuitry model which may then be used to create a physical implementation having hardware (e.g., an Application Specific Integrated Circuit). Those skilled in the art will recognize how to obtain, configure, and optimize suitable transmission or computational elements, material supplies, actuators, or other structures in light of these teachings. 
     The claims, description, and drawings of this application may describe one or more of the instant technologies in operational/functional language, for example as a set of operations to be performed by a computer. Such operational/functional description in most instances would be understood by one skilled the art as specifically-configured hardware (e.g., because a general purpose computer in effect becomes a special purpose computer once it is programmed to perform particular functions pursuant to instructions from program software). 
     Importantly, although the operational/functional descriptions described herein are understandable by the human mind, they are not abstract ideas of the operations/functions divorced from computational implementation of those operations/functions. Rather, the operations/functions represent a specification for massively complex computational machines or other means. As discussed in detail below, the operational/functional language must be read in its proper technological context, i.e., as concrete specifications for physical implementations. 
     The logical operations/functions described herein are a distillation of machine specifications or other physical mechanisms specified by the operations/functions such that the otherwise inscrutable machine specifications may be comprehensible to a human reader. The distillation also allows one of skill in the art to adapt the operational/functional description of the technology across many different specific vendors&#39; hardware configurations or platforms, without being limited to specific vendors&#39; hardware configurations or platforms. 
     Some of the present technical description (e.g., detailed description, drawings, claims, etc.) may be set forth in terms of logical operations/functions. As described in more detail herein, these logical operations/functions are not representations of abstract ideas, but rather are representative of static or sequenced specifications of various hardware elements. Differently stated, unless context dictates otherwise, the logical operations/functions will be understood by those of skill in the art to be representative of static or sequenced specifications of various hardware elements. This is true because tools available to one of skill in the art to implement technical disclosures set forth in operational/functional formats—tools in the form of a high-level programming language (e.g., C, java, visual basic), etc.), or tools in the form of Very high speed Hardware Description Language (“VHDL,” which is a language that uses text to describe logic circuits)—are generators of static or sequenced specifications of various hardware configurations. This fact is sometimes obscured by the broad term “software,” but, as shown by the following explanation, those skilled in the art understand that what is termed “software” is a shorthand for a massively complex interchaining/specification of ordered-matter elements. The term “ordered-matter elements” may refer to physical components of computation, such as assemblies of electronic logic gates, molecular computing logic constituents, quantum computing mechanisms, etc. 
     For example, a high-level programming language is a programming language with strong abstraction, e.g., multiple levels of abstraction, from the details of the sequential organizations, states, inputs, outputs, etc., of the machines that a high-level programming language actually specifies. See, e.g., Wikipedia, High-level programming language, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/High-level_programming_language (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:00 GMT). In order to facilitate human comprehension, in many instances, high-level programming languages resemble or even share symbols with natural languages. See, e.g., Wikipedia, Natural language, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Natural_language (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:00 GMT). 
     It has been argued that because high-level programming languages use strong abstraction (e.g., that they may resemble or share symbols with natural languages), they are therefore a “purely mental construct” (e.g., that “software”—computer program or computer programming—is somehow an ineffable mental construct, because at a high level of abstraction, it can be conceived and understood by a human reader). This argument has been used to characterize technical description in the form of functions/operations as somehow “abstract ideas.” In fact, in technological arts (e.g., the information and communication technologies) this is not true. 
     The fact that high-level programming languages use strong abstraction to facilitate human understanding should not be taken as an indication that what is expressed is an abstract idea. In fact, those skilled in the art understand that just the opposite is true. If a high-level programming language is the tool used to implement a technical disclosure in the form of functions/operations, those skilled in the art will recognize that, far from being abstract, imprecise, “fuzzy,” or “mental” in any significant semantic sense, such a tool is instead a near incomprehensibly precise sequential specification of specific computational machines—the parts of which are built up by activating/selecting such parts from typically more general computational machines over time (e.g., clocked time). This fact is sometimes obscured by the superficial similarities between high-level programming languages and natural languages. These superficial similarities also may cause a glossing over of the fact that high-level programming language implementations ultimately perform valuable work by creating/controlling many different computational machines. 
     The many different computational machines that a high-level programming language specifies are almost unimaginably complex. At base, the hardware used in the computational machines typically consists of some type of ordered matter (e.g., traditional electronic devices (e.g., transistors), deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), quantum devices, mechanical switches, optics, fluidics, pneumatics, optical devices (e.g., optical interference devices), molecules, etc.) that are arranged to form logic gates. Logic gates are typically physical devices that may be electrically, mechanically, chemically, or otherwise driven to change physical state in order to create a physical reality of logic, such as Boolean logic. 
     Logic gates may be arranged to form logic circuits, which are typically physical devices that may be electrically, mechanically, chemically, or otherwise driven to create a physical reality of certain logical functions. Types of logic circuits include such devices as multiplexers, registers, arithmetic logic units (ALUs), computer memory, etc., each type of which may be combined to form yet other types of physical devices, such as a central processing unit (CPU)—the best known of which is the microprocessor. A modern microprocessor will often contain more than one hundred million logic gates in its many logic circuits (and often more than a billion transistors). See, e.g., Wikipedia, Logic gates, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logic_gates (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:03 GMT). 
     The logic circuits forming the microprocessor are arranged to provide a microarchitecture that will carry out the instructions defined by that microprocessor&#39;s defined Instruction Set Architecture. The Instruction Set Architecture is the part of the microprocessor architecture related to programming, including the native data types, instructions, registers, addressing modes, memory architecture, interrupt and exception handling, and external Input/Output. See, e.g., Wikipedia, Computer architecture, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Computer_architecture (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:03 GMT). 
     The Instruction Set Architecture includes a specification of the machine language that can be used by programmers to use/control the microprocessor. Since the machine language instructions are such that they may be executed directly by the microprocessor, typically they consist of strings of binary digits, or bits. For example, a typical machine language instruction might be many bits long (e.g., 32, 64, or 128 bit strings are currently common). A typical machine language instruction might take the form “11110000101011110000111100111111” (a 32 bit instruction). 
     It is significant here that, although the machine language instructions are written as sequences of binary digits, in actuality those binary digits specify physical reality. For example, if certain semiconductors are used to make the operations of Boolean logic a physical reality, the apparently mathematical bits “1” and “0” in a machine language instruction actually constitute a shorthand that specifies the application of specific voltages to specific wires. For example, in some semiconductor technologies, the binary number “1” (e.g., logical “1”) in a machine language instruction specifies around +5 volts applied to a specific “wire” (e.g., metallic traces on a printed circuit board) and the binary number “0” (e.g., logical “0”) in a machine language instruction specifies around −5 volts applied to a specific “wire.” In addition to specifying voltages of the machines&#39; configurations, such machine language instructions also select out and activate specific groupings of logic gates from the millions of logic gates of the more general machine. Thus, far from abstract mathematical expressions, machine language instruction programs, even though written as a string of zeros and ones, specify many, many constructed physical machines or physical machine states. 
     Machine language is typically incomprehensible by most humans (e.g., the above example was just ONE instruction, and some personal computers execute more than two billion instructions every second). See, e.g., Wikipedia, Instructions per second, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instructions_per_second (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:04 GMT). Thus, programs written in machine language—which may be tens of millions of machine language instructions long—are incomprehensible to most humans. In view of this, early assembly languages were developed that used mnemonic codes to refer to machine language instructions, rather than using the machine language instructions&#39; numeric values directly (e.g., for performing a multiplication operation, programmers coded the abbreviation “mult,” which represents the binary number “011000” in MIPS machine code). While assembly languages were initially a great aid to humans controlling the microprocessors to perform work, in time the complexity of the work that needed to be done by the humans outstripped the ability of humans to control the microprocessors using merely assembly languages. 
     At this point, it was noted that the same tasks needed to be done over and over, and the machine language necessary to do those repetitive tasks was the same. In view of this, compilers were created. A compiler is a device that takes a statement that is more comprehensible to a human than either machine or assembly language, such as “add 2+2 and output the result,” and translates that human understandable statement into a complicated, tedious, and immense machine language code (e.g., millions of 32, 64, or 4128 bit length strings). Compilers thus translate high-level programming language into machine language. 
     This compiled machine language, as described above, is then used as the technical specification which sequentially constructs and causes the interoperation of many different computational machines such that useful, tangible, and concrete work is done. For example, as indicated above, such machine language—the compiled version of the higher-level language—functions as a technical specification which selects out hardware logic gates, specifies voltage levels, voltage transition timings, etc., such that the useful work is accomplished by the hardware. 
     Thus, a functional/operational technical description, when viewed by one of skill in the art, is far from an abstract idea. Rather, such a functional/operational technical description, when understood through the tools available in the art such as those just described, is instead understood to be a humanly understandable representation of a hardware specification, the complexity and specificity of which far exceeds the comprehension of most any one human. With this in mind, those skilled in the art will understand that any such operational/functional technical descriptions—in view of the disclosures herein and the knowledge of those skilled in the art—may be understood as operations made into physical reality by (a) one or more interchained physical machines, (b) interchained logic gates configured to create one or more physical machine(s) representative of sequential/combinatorial logic(s), (c) interchained ordered matter making up logic gates (e.g., interchained electronic devices (e.g., transistors), DNA, quantum devices, mechanical switches, optics, fluidics, pneumatics, molecules, etc.) that create physical reality of logic(s), or (d) virtually any combination of the foregoing. Indeed, any physical object which has a stable, measurable, and changeable state may be used to construct a machine based on the above technical description. Charles Babbage, for example, constructed the first mechanized computational apparatus out of wood, with the apparatus powered by cranking a handle. 
     Thus, far from being understood as an abstract idea, those skilled in the art will recognize a functional/operational technical description as a humanly-understandable representation of one or more almost unimaginably complex and time sequenced hardware instantiations. The fact that functional/operational technical descriptions might lend themselves readily to high-level computing languages (or high-level block diagrams for that matter) that share some words, structures, phrases, etc. with natural language should not be taken as an indication that such functional/operational technical descriptions are abstract ideas, or mere expressions of abstract ideas. In fact, as outlined herein, in the technological arts this is simply not true. When viewed through the tools available to those of skill in the art, such functional/operational technical descriptions are seen as specifying hardware configurations of almost unimaginable complexity. 
     As outlined above, the reason for the use of functional/operational technical descriptions is at least twofold. First, the use of functional/operational technical descriptions allows near-infinitely complex machines and machine operations arising from interchained hardware elements to be described in a manner that the human mind can process (e.g., by mimicking natural language and logical narrative flow). Second, the use of functional/operational technical descriptions assists the person of skill in the art in understanding the described subject matter by providing a description that is more or less independent of any specific vendor&#39;s piece(s) of hardware. 
     The use of functional/operational technical descriptions assists the person of skill in the art in understanding the described subject matter since, as is evident from the above discussion, one could easily, although not quickly, transcribe the technical descriptions set forth in this document as trillions of ones and zeroes, billions of single lines of assembly-level machine code, millions of logic gates, thousands of gate arrays, or any number of intermediate levels of abstractions. However, if any such low-level technical descriptions were to replace the present technical description, a person of skill in the art could encounter undue difficulty in implementing the disclosure, because such a low-level technical description would likely add complexity without a corresponding benefit (e.g., by describing the subject matter utilizing the conventions of one or more vendor-specific pieces of hardware). Thus, the use of functional/operational technical descriptions assists those of skill in the art by separating the technical descriptions from the conventions of any vendor-specific piece of hardware. 
     In view of the foregoing, the logical operations/functions set forth in the present technical description are representative of static or sequenced specifications of various ordered-matter elements, in order that such specifications may be comprehensible to the human mind and adaptable to create many various hardware configurations. The logical operations/functions disclosed herein should be treated as such, and should not be disparagingly characterized as abstract ideas merely because the specifications they represent are presented in a manner that one of skill in the art can readily understand and apply in a manner independent of a specific vendor&#39;s hardware implementation. 
     Those skilled in the art will recognize that it is common within the art to implement devices and/or processes and/or systems, and thereafter use engineering and/or other practices to integrate such implemented devices and/or processes and/or systems into more comprehensive devices and/or processes and/or systems. That is, at least a portion of the devices and/or processes and/or systems described herein can be integrated into other devices and/or processes and/or systems via a reasonable amount of experimentation. Those having skill in the art will recognize that examples of such other devices and/or processes and/or systems might include—as appropriate to context and application—all or part of devices and/or processes and/or systems of (a) an air conveyance (e.g., an airplane, rocket, helicopter, etc.), (b) a ground conveyance (e.g., a car, truck, locomotive, tank, armored personnel carrier, etc.), (c) a building (e.g., a home, warehouse, office, etc.), (d) an appliance (e.g., a refrigerator, a washing machine, a dryer, etc.), (e) a communications system (e.g., a networked system, a telephone system, a Voice over IP system, etc.), (f) a business entity (e.g., an Internet Service Provider (ISP) entity such as Comcast Cable, Qwest, Southwestern Bell, etc.), or (g) a wired/wireless services entity (e.g., Sprint, Cingular, Nextel, etc.), etc. 
     In certain cases, use of a system or method may occur in a territory even if components are located outside the territory. For example, in a distributed computing context, use of a distributed computing system may occur in a territory even though parts of the system may be located outside of the territory (e.g., relay, server, processor, signal-bearing medium, transmitting computer, receiving computer, etc. located outside the territory). 
     A sale of a system or method may likewise occur in a territory even if components of the system or method are located and/or used outside the territory. Further, implementation of at least part of a system for performing a method in one territory does not preclude use of the system in another territory 
     One skilled in the art will recognize that the herein described components (e.g., operations), devices, objects, and the discussion accompanying them are used as examples for the sake of conceptual clarity and that various configuration modifications are contemplated. Consequently, as used herein, the specific exemplars set forth and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, use of any specific exemplar is intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of specific components (e.g., operations), devices, and objects should not be taken limiting. 
     The herein described subject matter sometimes illustrates different components contained within, or connected with, different other components. It is to be understood that such depicted architectures are merely exemplary, and that in fact many other architectures may be implemented which achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense, any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality is effectively “associated” such that the desired functionality is achieved. Hence, any two components herein combined to achieve a particular functionality can be seen as “associated with” each other such that the desired functionality is achieved, irrespective of architectures or intermedial components. Likewise, any two components so associated can also be viewed as being “operably connected”, or “operably coupled,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being “operably couplable,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components, and/or wirelessly interactable, and/or wirelessly interacting components, and/or logically interacting, and/or logically interactable components. 
     In some instances, one or more components may be referred to herein as “configured to,” “configured by,” “configurable to,” “operable/operative to,” “adapted/adaptable,” “able to,” “conformable/conformed to,” etc. Those skilled in the art will recognize that such terms (e.g. “configured to”) generally encompass active-state components and/or inactive-state components and/or standby-state components, unless context requires otherwise. 
     In a general sense, those skilled in the art will recognize that the various embodiments described herein can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by various types of electro-mechanical systems having a wide range of electrical components such as hardware, software, firmware, and/or virtually any combination thereof, limited to patentable subject matter under 35 U.S.C. 101; and a wide range of components that may impart mechanical force or motion such as rigid bodies, spring or torsional bodies, hydraulics, electro-magnetically actuated devices, and/or virtually any combination thereof. Consequently, as used herein “electro-mechanical system” includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry operably coupled with a transducer (e.g., an actuator, a motor, a piezoelectric crystal, a Micro Electro Mechanical System (MEMS), etc.), electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of memory (e.g., random access, flash, read only, etc.)), electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, optical-electrical equipment, etc.), and/or any non-electrical analog thereto, such as optical or other analogs (e.g., graphene based circuitry). Those skilled in the art will also appreciate that examples of electro-mechanical systems include but are not limited to a variety of consumer electronics systems, medical devices, as well as other systems such as motorized transport systems, factory automation systems, security systems, and/or communication/computing systems. Those skilled in the art will recognize that electro-mechanical as used herein is not necessarily limited to a system that has both electrical and mechanical actuation except as context may dictate otherwise. 
     In a general sense, those skilled in the art will recognize that the various aspects described herein which can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, and/or any combination thereof can be viewed as being composed of various types of “electrical circuitry.” Consequently, as used herein “electrical circuitry” includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of memory (e.g., random access, flash, read only, etc.)), and/or electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, optical-electrical equipment, etc.). Those having skill in the art will recognize that the subject matter described herein may be implemented in an analog or digital fashion or some combination thereof. 
     Those skilled in the art will recognize that at least a portion of the devices and/or processes described herein can be integrated into a data processing system. Those having skill in the art will recognize that a data processing system generally includes one or more of a system unit housing, a video display device, memory such as volatile or non-volatile memory, processors such as microprocessors or digital signal processors, computational entities such as operating systems, drivers, graphical user interfaces, and applications programs, one or more interaction devices (e.g., a touch pad, a touch screen, an antenna, etc.), and/or control systems including feedback loops and control motors (e.g., feedback for sensing position and/or velocity; control motors for moving and/or adjusting components and/or quantities). A data processing system may be implemented utilizing suitable commercially available components, such as those typically found in data computing/communication and/or network computing/communication systems. 
     For the purposes of this application, “cloud” computing may be understood as described in the cloud computing literature. For example, cloud computing may be methods and/or systems for the delivery of computational capacity and/or storage capacity as a service. The “cloud” may refer to one or more hardware and/or software components that deliver or assist in the delivery of computational and/or storage capacity, including, but not limited to, one or more of a client, an application, a platform, an infrastructure, and/or a server The cloud may refer to any of the hardware and/or software associated with a client, an application, a platform, an infrastructure, and/or a server. For example, cloud and cloud computing may refer to one or more of a computer, a processor, a storage medium, a router, a switch, a modem, a virtual machine (e.g., a virtual server), a data center, an operating system, a middleware, a firmware, a hardware back-end, a software back-end, and/or a software application. A cloud may refer to a private cloud, a public cloud, a hybrid cloud, and/or a community cloud. A cloud may be a shared pool of configurable computing resources, which may be public, private, semi-private, distributable, scaleable, flexible, temporary, virtual, and/or physical. A cloud or cloud service may be delivered over one or more types of network, e.g., a mobile communication network, and the Internet. 
     As used in this application, a cloud or a cloud service may include one or more of infrastructure-as-a-service (“IaaS”), platform-as-a-service (“PaaS”), software-as-a-service (“SaaS”), and/or desktop-as-a-service (“DaaS”). As a non-exclusive example, IaaS may include, e.g., one or more virtual server instantiations that may start, stop, access, and/or configure virtual servers and/or storage centers (e.g., providing one or more processors, storage space, and/or network resources on-demand, e.g., EMC and Rackspace). PaaS may include, e.g., one or more software and/or development tools hosted on an infrastructure (e.g., a computing platform and/or a solution stack from which the client can create software interfaces and applications, e.g., Microsoft Azure). SaaS may include, e.g., software hosted by a service provider and accessible over a network (e.g., the software for the application and/or the data associated with that software application may be kept on the network, e.g., Google Apps, SalesForce). DaaS may include, e.g., providing desktop, applications, data, and/or services for the user over a network (e.g., providing a multi-application framework, the applications in the framework, the data associated with the applications, and/or services related to the applications and/or the data over the network, e.g., Citrix). The foregoing is intended to be exemplary of the types of systems and/or methods referred to in this application as “cloud” or “cloud computing” and should not be considered complete or exhaustive. 
     The proliferation of automation in many transactions is apparent. For example, Automated Teller Machines (“ATMs”) dispense money and receive deposits. Airline ticket counter machines check passengers in, dispense tickets, and allow passengers to change or upgrade flights. Train and subway ticket counter machines allow passengers to purchase a ticket to a particular destination without invoking a human interaction at all. Many groceries and pharmacies have self-service checkout machines which allow a consumer to pay for goods purchased by interacting only with a machine. Large companies now staff telephone answering systems with machines that interact with customers, and invoke a human in the transaction only if there is a problem with the machine-facilitated transaction. 
     Nevertheless, as such automation increases, convenience and accessibility may decrease. Self-checkout machines at grocery stores may be difficult to operate. ATMs and ticket counter machines may be mostly inaccessible to disabled persons or persons requiring special access. Where before, the interaction with a human would allow disabled persons to complete transactions with relative ease, if a disabled person is unable to push the buttons on an ATM, there is little the machine can do to facilitate the transaction to completion. While some of these public terminals allow speech operations, they are configured to the most generic forms of speech, which may be less useful in recognizing particular speakers, thereby leading to frustration for users attempting to speak to the machine. This problem may be especially challenging for the disabled, who already may face significant challenges in completing transactions with automated machines. 
     In addition, smartphones and tablet devices also now are configured to receive speech commands. Speech and voice controlled automobile systems now appear regularly in motor vehicles, even in economical, mass-produced vehicles. Home entertainment devices, e.g., disc players, televisions, radios, stereos, and the like, may respond to speech commands. Additionally, home security systems may respond to speech commands. In an office setting, a worker&#39;s computer may respond to speech from that worker, allowing faster, more efficient work flows. Such systems and machines may be trained to operate with particular users, either through explicit training or through repeated interactions. Nevertheless, when that system is upgraded or replaced, e.g., a new television is purchased, that training may be lost with the device. Thus, in some embodiments described herein, adaptation data for speech recognition systems may be separated from the device which recognizes the speech, and may be more closely associated with a user, e.g., through a device carried by the user, or through a network location associated with the user. 
     Further, in some environments, there may be more than one device that transmits and receives data within a range of interacting with a user. For example, merely sitting on a couch watching television may involve five or more devices, e.g., a television, a cable box, an audio/visual receiver, a remote control, and a smartphone device. Some of these devices may transmit or receive speech data. Some of these devices may transmit, receive, or store adaptation data, as will be described in more detail herein. Thus, in some embodiments, which will be described in more detail herein, there may be methods, systems, and devices for determining which devices in a system should perform actions that allow a user to efficiently interact with an intended device through that user&#39;s speech. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 1 , there is shown a system  10  comprising an apparatus  100  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Apparatus  100  may include one or more instances of account update modules  120  each configured to allocate or otherwise handle cost components  121 ,  122 ,  123 ; of service configuration modules  130  configured to establish or update one or more routes  131 ,  132 ,  133  (a bidirectional interpersonal communication or other signal path via which one or more messages  137  or other communication services  135 ,  136  are implemented, e.g.); of account configuration modules  141 ; of cohort identification modules  142 ; of service request handling modules  143 ,  144 ; of initiation modules  171 ,  172 ; of response modules  185 ; of allocation modules  1641 ,  1642 ; of detection modules  1684 ; of input modules  1684 ; of interface modules  1721 ; of notification modules  1743 ,  1744 ; of registration modules  1971 ,  1972 ; or aggregation modules  1981  as described below. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 2 , there is shown a system  20  in or across which one or more instances of apparatus  100  or its components may be instantiated (in subsystems or mobile devices described below, e.g.) and in which one or more technologies may be implemented.  FIG. 2  comprises a grid of 4 sheets by 6 sheets, the grid being summarized in a legend in  FIG. 2A .  FIG. 2  shows a partially schematic diagram of an environment(s) and/or an implementation(s) of technologies described herein. It is noted that  FIG. 2  is a high-level environment diagram. As such, some elements of the system of  FIG. 2  are expressed through the function they carry out. In such circumstances, these elements should be considered to include any combination of one or more program, microprocessor configuration, state machine, transistor-based event sequencing structure, firmware, field-programmable gate array (“FPGA”) configuration, application programming interface (“API”), function, class, data structure, dynamically loaded library (“DLL”), database (e.g., SQL database), or other such special-purpose modules implemented in a structure or method eligible for patent protection under 35 U.S.C. §101. 
     U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,989 (“Context-sensitive query enrichment”) describes search protocols that are useful in a context of smartphones or similar mobile devices implementing wireless communication. As described with reference to  FIG. 9  thereof and also to  FIG. 2B  herein, handheld interface device  962  permits a user to carry or otherwise support the device  962  as shown, while extending one or more of his fingers or arms  968  into a space where such limb can be detected (optically, e.g.) by the device  962 . Moreover the user can effectively use one or more such limbs to indicate a three-dimensional region  903  containing one or more elements  931 ,  932  of interest to the user (on a poster  907  within sight of the user&#39;s facial region  901 , e.g.). In some implementations device  962  also includes one or more microphones  941  or other sensors  951 ,  952  operable to capture one or more expressions  945  (in sounds in region  902 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more networks  1200  are operably coupled with device  962  (via access point  1820  and network interface  2500 , e.g.) so that a face  981 , character sequence  982 , or other search pattern  983  (expressed digitally, e.g.) can be downloaded or recognized (e.g. in optical data from one or more sensors  951 ,  952 ). In some contexts, as described below, this permits one or more modules described herein (implementing one or more instances of a dialog manager in device  962  or network  1200 , e.g.) to estimate a location of one or more regions, limbs, visible elements, or other such entities relative to one or more reference positions  925 ,  926 . 
     With reference now to FIG. 18 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,989, shown there is a high-level logic flow that includes recognizing a position of a first limb of a person in relation to a facial region of the person and to a three-dimensional region indicated by the first limb of the person, the three-dimensional region including a first informational element (e.g. an estimation module assigning two or more coordinates signaling a location of the person&#39;s finger, hand, or arm  968  in relation to a stationary or other frame of reference that can also signal respective locations of a facial region  901  of the person and a 3D region  903  that includes one or more informational elements  931 ,  932 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the 3D region  903  is farther than the arm  968  (in relation to the facial region  901  of the person) and in which the estimation module uses standard positioning coordinates (GPS with altitude, e.g.) or some other frame of reference in relation to which facial region  901  and 3D region  903  can be mathematically expressed. In some variants, for example, a handheld device  962  may include a first optical sensor  951  configured to capture first optical data (an image, e.g.) positionally related to one or more reference positions  925 ,  926  (located in device  962  or facial region  901  or some other frame of reference, e.g.) and a second optical sensor  952  configured to capture second optical data (another image, e.g.) positionally related to the same reference position(s)  925 ,  926  contemporaneously therewith (within a few seconds, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which “first” optical data indicates an approximate position of the facial region  901  of the person (in relation to device  962 , e.g.) and in which “second” optical data indicates an approximate position of one or more elements  931 ,  932  in a 3D region toward which the person gestures (with a finger or arm  968 , e.g.). In some variants, such an estimation module can perform this function using optical data obtained from only a single optical sensor  952 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  962  is configured to be worn or held in facial region  901 , establishing a reference position in the facial region. More generally, a limb position is known “in relation to” another entity (an item or region, e.g.) if each is assigned a specific location (expressed in coordinates or a natural language expression, e.g.) in a frame of reference common to both. 
     The logic flow also includes transmitting a search result relating to the first informational element and partly based on first auditory data from a vicinity of the person and partly based on the position of the first limb of the person in relation to the facial region of the person and to the three-dimensional region indicated by the first limb of the person (e.g. a statement module transmitting a result of a search task resulting from a search pattern  983  that includes a face  981  or character sequence  982  obtained from visible elements  931 ,  932  of the user&#39;s environment in response to auditory data from the same environment and to the region  903  indicated by the finger, hand, or arm  968 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the user&#39;s vicinity (region  902 , e.g.) defines “the environment,” in which the auditory data and one or more visible elements  931 ,  932  are both captured (respectively via microphone  941  and optical sensor  951 , e.g.) in the same device  962 ; in which the indicated region  903  or auditory data may each trigger an exclusion or inclusion of one or more candidate elements; and in which search pattern  983  would otherwise have to be constructed by a more laborious process. In some contexts, for example, the auditory data may include a corroboratory expression  945  relating to one element (e.g. an utterance of “face” or “Smith” or “guy” or “who”). Alternatively or additionally, in some contexts, the auditory data may include timing data signaling that an audible event was detected while the user apparently looked at the “first” informational element. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, the flow in FIG. 18 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,989 permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a mobile device that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to establish or maintain modes of communication service  136  (phone connections, e.g.) that permit collaborative investigation that would not otherwise exist. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  962  participates in a delivery of messages  137  (search task descriptions or results, e.g.) or other communication services  135 ,  136  (as a cellular subscriber&#39;s device, e.g.) as described below. 
     In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for comparing a face or other informational element with a database of similar items as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,000,528 (“Method and apparatus for authenticating printed documents using multi-level image comparison based on document characteristics”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,949,191 (“Method and system for searching for information on a network in response to an image query sent by a user from a mobile communications device”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,908,518 (“Method, system and computer program product for failure analysis implementing automated comparison of multiple reference models”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,856,137 (“Apparatus and method for verifying image by comparison with template image”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,831,559 (“Concept-based trends and exceptions tracking”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,787,693 (“Text detection on mobile communications devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,644,055 (“Rule-based database object matching with comparison certainty”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,443,787 (“Cluster system, cluster member, and failure recovery method and program thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,424,729 (“Optical fingerprint security verification using separate target and reference planes and a uniqueness comparison scheme”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,167,398 (“Information retrieval system and method that generates weighted comparison results to analyze the degree of dissimilarity between a reference corpus and a candidate document”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,134,014 (“Apparatus and method of inspecting phase shift masks using comparison of a mask die image to the mask image database”). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 2C , there is shown a user  175  straddling a zone boundary  7150  separating a wireless local area network (WLAN) zone  7114  (including a smartphone or similar device  7101  able to use Wi-Fi, e.g.) from a cell-only zone  7115  (including a handheld device  7102  that cannot presently access any Wi-Fi hotspot but can communicate via a cellular network, e.g.). Device  7102  includes several externally visible features (speakers  442  and cameras  443 , e.g.) and several internal features (an integrated circuit  440  having one or more memories  431 ,  432  and one or more special-purpose modules  425 ,  428 ) manufactured or otherwise configured to provide features described herein. In the interest of concision and according to standard usage in communication technologies, such features are set forth in natural language expressions. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that such expressions (functions or acts recited in English, e.g.) adequately describe structures identified below so that no undue experimentation will be required for their implementation. For example, any records or other informational data identified herein may easily be represented digitally as a voltage configuration on one or more electrical nodes (pads  435 , e.g.) of an event-sequencing structure (transistor-based circuitry on an integrated circuit  440 , e.g.) without any undue experimentation. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 2D , there is shown a base transceiver station (BTS)  310  wirelessly coupled to device  7102  and also to device  1000 . Device  1000  (a handheld device or passenger vehicle or communication satellite, e.g.) includes one or more subscriber identity modules (SIMs)  1011 ; frequency hopping modules  1013 ; transmitter/receiver modules  1014 ; channel management modules  1015 ; signal processing modules  1016 ; user interfaces  1017 ; encoders  1018 ; and decoders  1019 . Except as noted, mobile wireless communication devices and subsystems depicted herein each include most or all of these components. In some cases, such components (SIMs, e.g.) may be readily removable or reconfigurable as described herein. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 3D , there is shown a base station controller (BSC)  510  operably coupled (through a fiberoptic conduit, e.g.) with BTS  310 . To facilitate control of one or more BTS&#39;s, as shown, BSC  510  may include one or more channel allocation modules  511 ; signal timing modules  513 ; and handover modules  518 . BTS  310  and BSC  510  may typically be subsystems of a network operated by a cellular service provider (Verizon, e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIGS. 3B and 3C , there are shown a plurality of access points  1810 ,  1820  operably coupled (via a wireless linkage, e.g.) with and controlled by a switch  4110 . Each such access point may be implemented as a wireless router, for example, through which mobile devices  962 ,  7101  may access a network  1200  (the Internet, e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIGS. 3A and 4A , there is shown another user  177 , also operating a handheld device  2750 . In some contexts, as described below, device  2750  may initiate a communication service (telephone call, e.g.) or may indicate its location via access point  1820 . Also as described below, device  2750  may likewise initiate a communication service or may indicate its present location via a cellular network (including BTS  320 , e.g.). In either case, or both, many such users may continually report indications of changes in service availability to one or more access map servers  2300  that aggregate such status data  2320  into regional service maps  2330 , segments  2337  of which may then be provided selectively to devices in locations corresponding thereto. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 4B , there is shown a base station controller (BSC)  520  configured to control BTS  320 . It comprises one or more instances of channel allocation modules  521 , signal timing modules  523 , and handover modules  528  configured to facilitate operations described herein. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 4C , there is shown a mobile switching center (MSC)  600  including one or more instances of authentication centers  610 ; equipment identity registers  630 ; home location registers  640 ; and visitor location registers  650 . Such components of MSC  600  are each configured to interact with one or more instances of BSC  520  to facilitate operations as described herein. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 4D , there is shown a subscriber database  680  (implemented within or otherwise operably coupled with MSC  600 . Subscriber database  680  includes numerous records, for example, associating each device (identified as a field labeled “Cust_ID,” e.g.) with a monthly allocation of minutes corresponding to a plan that the subscriber pays for; with a “balance” of remaining minutes available to that customer or device; and with an indicator of a remaining duration (in days, e.g.) until a replenishment of the “balance” will be applied. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 5D , there is shown a network  1200  having one or more instance of channel establishment systems  1210 ; channel adaptation systems  1220 ; public switched packet data network (PSPDN) subsystems  1260 ; public switched telephone network (PSTN) subsystems  1260 ; or communication satellites  1293 . Those skilled in the art will understand a variety of configurations of such networks and devices  1000  (satellite phones or radios, e.g.) served by them. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 5C , there are shown one or more instances of network interfaces  2400 ,  2500  suitable for facilitating an interaction between network  1200  and WLAN access points (via switch  4110 , e.g.). In some instances, such network interfaces include one or more instances of firewalls  2470  or high speed modems  2480 . 
     With reference now to  FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 6A , users  178 ,  179  in a “free ride” zone  7815  accessible by a cellular network (including BTS  330 , e.g.) are shown using mobile devices  7802 ,  7822 . These users are not subscribers in any cellular network in contractual privity with the entity that owns BTS  330  and so do not pay for cellular service. Nevertheless under conditions described herein, one or more limited service as described herein may be provided to them. In response to a subscribing user  175  attempting to establish a communication service to a non-subscribing user, for example, the cellular network may transmit a map segment  2337  or other indications of nearby WLAN service availability (depicting WLAN zone  7214 , e.g.). In some variants such information may be a real-time response to a service request from user  175 . In others such information may be provided on a frequent basis (daily or more often, e.g.) in response to cohort identification module  142  receiving an indication that a subscribing user  175  has identified one or more devices  7802 ,  7822  used by the non-subscribing user(s). In some contexts, for example, cohort identification module  142  may accept a limited number of such device designations for each subscribing user. Alternatively or additionally, such indications of nearby WLAN service availability may be contingent on the one or more non-subscriber devices  7802 ,  7822  being configured to provide a service in return: to function as a hotspot, for example, or to report indications of changes in service availability (deviations from that indicated by map  2330 , e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIGS. 6B, 6C, and 6D , there are shown a plurality of access points  1830 ,  1840  connected with network interface  2400  via switch  4120 . Also there is shown a BTS  340  operably coupled with network  1200  via BSC  510  and MSC  700 . 
     In some variants, moreover, devices  7801 ,  7821  in WLAN zone  7214  (1) may be advised of an estimated position of, or imminent crossing of, a zone boundary  7850  or (2) may otherwise interact with an access map server  2300  (via base transceiver station  330  or via access point  1840 , e.g.) in any of the modes described above. (One or more instances of access map server  2300  or other apparatuses  100  described herein for supervisory or supplemental functions may be implemented in any of several subsystems described herein, in or around network  1200 .) In some variants, one or more access points  1810 ,  1820 ,  1830 ,  1840  may also be constructed and arranged to provide a fixed wireless linkage from a power meter to a network. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 7D , there is shown a more magnified view of user  179  (showing a subsequent position east and south of WLAN zone  7214 , e.g.) using a headset  355  operably coupled to interact (via BTS  340 , e.g.) with network  1200  as shown. Likewise with reference to  FIG. 7C , there is shown a user having wearable articles (eyewear  351  or a clip unit  353  or wristwear  538 , e.g.) of which one or more may be configured without a transmit antenna but able to receive an RF signal. In respective embodiments, each such item may be configured to receive a signal (1) from a WLAN access point  1830  or (2) from a base transceiver station  340  or (3) from either when the respective wearable article is in a position to receive such signals. 
     Referring again to  FIG. 1  with regard to the system  20  of  FIG. 2 , account configuration module  141  comprises special-purpose circuitry (a transistor-based event sequencing structure, e.g.) that associates or otherwise obtains an indication of an account (a quantification of “remaining minutes” or other available assets represented digitally, e.g.) associated with device  7101 . User  175  (a cellular subscriber, e.g.) owns an account identified as 507779-7267 that has been linked to device  7101  (a smartphone, e.g.) as shown in subscriber status database  680 . Account configuration module  141  interacts with subscriber status database  680  that indicates a monthly allocation of 500 minutes, 134 of which are currently available for use within the next 5 days as shown. User  175  will incur an excess-use penalty if more than 134 minutes are used within 5 days, but will receive 500 additional minutes at that time in a conventional manner. 
     Account update module  120  is likewise implemented as special-purpose circuitry that can, under some circumstances, debit the minute balance or otherwise allocate a cost component  131  (against the 134-minute balance or otherwise as an amount of currency, e.g.) of a communication service  36  (video call, e.g.) between device  7101  and one or more other devices  7801 ,  7802 ,  7822  that depends upon whether such other device is within WLAN service space (in WLAN zone  7214  or some other suitable hotspot, e.g.) or not. This can occur, for example, in a context in which such other device is not associated with any conventional wireless carrier (Verizon, e.g.), such as in which one or more users  178 ,  179  of such devices have cancelled their subscription. If two communication service participants  7101 ,  7801  are both within WLAN service space, service configuration module  130  establishes the communication service  136  between them along a non-cellular route  131  (such as via access points  1820 ,  1840 ; switches  4110 ,  4120 ; and network interfaces  2400 ,  2500 ). If user  175  is operating a device  7102  outside WLAN service space (in cell-only zone  7115 , e.g.), service configuration module  130  establishes communication service  136  along a route  132  that is part cellular (from network  1200  to user  175 , e.g.) and part non-cellular (from network  1200  to device  7801 , e.g.). In this configuration, user  175  incurs a cost component  142  that does not depend upon user  178 &#39;s presence in or absence from WLAN service space (consuming his minutes at his normal usage rate during premium “anytime minute” hours defined by his wireless carrier, e.g.). If users  175 ,  178  at both ends of a communication service  136  are outside WLAN service space (such as when using devices  7102 ,  7802 ), however, account update module  130  will charge user  175  at a higher rate (1.5 or 2.5 “minute” currency units per minute of call duration, e.g.) so that the non-subscribing user  178  (using device  7802 , e.g.) can participate in the communication service without charge. This can occur, for example, in a context in which route  132  could otherwise not be established (via BTS  330 , e.g.) and in which user  175  would otherwise have to wait for user  178  to re-enter WLAN service space even to get a unidirectional message  137  through to user  178 . 
     If user  175  is inside WLAN service space and user  178  is not, service configuration module  130  will establish communication service  136  as a part-cellular route  133  (via BSC  520 , MSC  600 , switch  4110 , and access point  1820 , e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which communication service  136  will only include a unidirectional message  137  (a ping or SMS text string, e.g.). In some variants, for example, a wireless carrier will only pass such messages toward the subscriber; in others, only messages from the subscriber will be passed; in still others, the charge for respective directions of message travel may be different. 
     In some variants, service configuration module  130  may decide, based on one or more indications of low network loading at the time of a user interaction, to permit user  175  to establish a voice call or even a video call as the communication service  136 . At other times, service configuration module  130  may present to user  175  a “grayed” touchscreen button or other indication that such resource-intensive service is currently unavailable for interacting with non-subscribers through the cellular networks. 
     In some instances, account update module  120  may debit the account linked to device  7101  (identified as 507779-7267, e.g.) for a communication service  135  established even with a user  179  who is in WLAN service space. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the device  7821  being operated by user  179  is a passenger vehicle or when user  175  has provided an indication (as a menu selection on his device, e.g.) that a premium for cellular access to user  178  is desirable, whether user  175  is using his device  7101  within WLAN service space or using his device  7102  outside WLAN service space. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 7A , there is shown a high-level logic flow  3200  disclosed in FIG. 32 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow  3200  describes an operation  28  of establishing both a wireless communication channel via a first device and from a second device and a wireless communication channel from the second device and via a third device (e.g. initiation modules  171 ,  172  respectively creating parallel communication channels from device  7801 , each including at least one wireless linkage). This can occur, for example, in a context in which base transceiver station  330  is the “first” device; in which device  7801  is the “second” device; in which access point  1840  is (an instance of) the “third” device; and in which at least two such parallel channels exist simultaneously at some time during the communication service. In a telephonic implementation, for example, (both or all) such channels may bear digitized auditory data simultaneously, optionally including a particular component of user data passing simultaneously through a primary channel through another channel. 
     Flow  3200  also describes an operation  32  of signaling a decision of how much user data to transmit via the wireless communication channel from the second device and via the third device responsive to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate of the wireless communication channel via the first device and from the second device exceeds a threshold (e.g. allocation module  1641  causing one or more transmission modules to increase a fraction of digitized auditory data transmitted the third device as an incremental response to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate via the first device exceeds a threshold). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the incremental response causes a partial reduction in a volume of data block delivery failure events and in which such wireless communication channel allocations would otherwise be made in a crude or unduly computation-intensive fashion (by conventional signal strength or load balancing or bit error rate indicia, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, allocation module  1641  may be configured to close a channel when a traffic volume through it becomes low enough (after several iterations of reduction, e.g.). When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow  3200  permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to establish or maintain routes of communication service  136  (phone connections or message delivery, e.g.) that would not otherwise exist. 
     With reference again to  FIG. 7A , there is shown a high-level logic flow  3300  disclosed in FIG. 33 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow  3300  describes an operation  24  of obtaining at a first device an identifier of a second device (e.g. registration module  1971  maintaining a local instance of a contact list within device  7102  including a phone number or similar identification associated with user  178 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  7102  is the “first” device; in which device  7802  is the “second” device; and in which a telephone switch or server (a mobile switching center  600  or similar subsystem in network  1200 , e.g.) associates the phone number with one or more mobile devices operated by user  178 . 
     Flow  3300  also describes an operation  30  of causing the first device to display a Boolean indication whether or not the second device is within a wireless local area network communication range of a third device without a bidirectional interpersonal communication existing between the first device and the second device (e.g. notification module  1744  triggering device  7102  to display a positive status indication signifying that device  7802  is within WLAN zone  7214  without first establishing a telephone call or similar bidirectional interpersonal communication between device  7102  and mobile device  7802 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which WLAN zone  7214  is established as an operating range of access point  1840 , e.g.); in which a user of device  7102  can initiate a telephone call or similar interpersonal communication to user  178  via device  7102  in response to one or more such indications; and in which user  178  would otherwise be unable to participate in such communication. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow  3300  permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement a basic communication service  136  (a page or Boolean notification via an LED or earpiece/speaker, e.g.) that would not otherwise exist. 
     With reference again to  FIG. 7A , there is shown a high-level logic flow  3400  disclosed in FIG. 34 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow  3400  describes an operation  27  of obtaining a Boolean indication of whether or not a first device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval, the recent time interval being less than an hour (e.g. detection module  1671  generating a comparison result as a direct or indirect Boolean indication that a maximum crossing rate threshold was greater than an average rate at which a device  7822  had apparently crossed wireless service zone boundaries  7150 ,  7850  in a region during a particular time interval). This can occur, for example, in a context in which an aggregation module has received a series of several indications of crossing events; in which one or more of such indications was not “qualifying” (because it did not pertain to an event within the time interval, e.g.); in which the time interval is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which detection module  1671  (comprising a comparator, e.g.) compares a count of such other indications with a threshold. In an implementation of detection module  1671  in which the threshold is four, for example, a count of three crossings will result in a negative indication (signifying infrequent crossings, e.g.). In another context (in which only service region departures are “qualifying,” e.g.) detection module  1671  may generate a positive indication (signifying frequent crossings, e.g.) by applying a nominal threshold of two against a count of three (signifying a registration module detecting departure events, e.g.). Other variants of detection module  1671  may perform operation  27  using a variety of protocols. A crossing rate threshold may be effectively adapted by applying one or more offsets or multipliers to the count, for example, or by including other quantitative modifiers as described herein. Alternatively or additionally, detection module  1671  may implement conjunctive determinants, disjunctive determinants, or other such modes of implementing comparisons as indicated in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. 
     Flow  3400  also describes an operation  33  of signaling an availability to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication conditionally, partly based on the Boolean indication whether or not the first device exceeded the wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within the recent time interval and partly based on a Boolean indication of the first device being within a wireless communication range of a second device (e.g. notification module  1743  causing a headset  355  or display to provide a user  175  with an automatic and conditional decision as to whether or not device  7822  is currently available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication as communication service  136 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  7822  is the “first” device; in which access point  1810  is the “second” device; in which the decision will be positive (signaling availability, e.g.) if device  7822  remains continuously within the wireless service zone for longer than the time interval; in which the time interval is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which much more resource-intensive modeling (requiring frequent monitoring of satellite  1293  by a GPS module, e.g.) would otherwise be required to determine whether the first device is currently viable for such a communication. In some variants, moreover, determining availability by another mode (purely by a ground speed of device  7822  being low enough, e.g.) might generate false negatives unduly. The decision may (optionally) be signaled by a sound (a chord, e.g.) or by a word (“ready,” e.g.) or other displayed symbol (a light-emitting diode coming on, e.g.), for example, or by other such expressions played or displayed in a vicinity of one or more users  175 ,  179 ,  180  (via eyewear  351 , a clip unit  353 , wristwear  358 , a headset  355 , or other wearable or other device described herein, e.g.). Some such devices may be configured for downlink only, or may be associated with a smartphone or similar device  1000  (via a personal area network technology in the ISM band from 2400-2480 MHz such as Bluetooth®, e.g.) having a trackable location (by GPS, e.g.). Moreover in some embodiments a notification module may signal a positive decision by establishing the bidirectional interpersonal communication (comprising a video chat session or similar dialog, e.g.), moreover, or may signal a negative decision by doing nothing. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow  3400  permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device  7822  that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement various communication services  135 ,  136  (a teleconference or portion thereof, e.g.) describe above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 7B , there is shown a high-level logic flow  3500  disclosed in FIG. 35 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow  3500  describes an operation  26  of obtaining via a first device configuration data establishing a first security protocol (e.g. input module  1684  receiving via one or more linkages a secure access code effectively deeming one or more data patterns to be “acceptable”). This can occur, for example, in a context in which such linkages include a signal-bearing conduit (an antenna or optical cable, e.g.) as the “first” device, via which a configuration unit transmits an access code to a supervisor unit; and in which the access code includes a current password provided by a password generation module. In some contexts, for example, a secondary device remote from the supervisor unit may be configured to perform such transmissions regularly (daily, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more instances of a configuration unit may implement an initial security-protocol-implementing data pattern (during manufacture of the supervisor unit, e.g.) for limiting access to one or more services (network resources, e.g.) prior to any reconfiguration of the supervisor unit. 
     Flow  3500  also describes an operation  29  of obtaining via a second device a wireless signal containing access request data (e.g. interface module  1721  receiving a wireless signal containing access request data). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the “second” device is an antenna and in which device  2750  (in  FIG. 3A ) transmits a wireless signal as a response to input (key press events or voice commands, e.g.) from user  177  (initiating a telephone call, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device  2750  may transmit access request data (requesting to establish an open channel, e.g.) as an automatic response to device  2750  entering WLAN zone  7114  (comprising a wireless operating range of access point  1820 , e.g.). 
     Flow  3500  also describes an operation  31  of signaling a decision whether or not to provide a first network access service via a third device responsive to whether or not the access request data in the wireless signal matches the first security protocol (e.g. registration module  1972  signaling a decision to provide device  2750  with a service that includes access to network  1200  via control module  3031  (in  FIG. 3B ) as an automatic and conditional response to an application module determining that access request data (a password, e.g.) matches a security-protocol-implementing data pattern). 
     Flow  3500  also describes an operation  35  of signaling a decision whether or not to provide a second network access service via the third device responsive to whether or not the access request data matches a second security protocol, the third device implementing a firewall between the first network access service and the second network access service (e.g. allocation module  1642  signaling a conditional decision not to provide an entity that transmits access request data with a service communication service  135  that includes access to network  1200  as an automatic and conditional response to an application module determining that access request data does not match security-protocol-implementing data pattern). This can occur, for example, in a context in which NAC unit  3030  is the “third” device; in which control module  3031  provides the “second” device with access to network  1200  (as the “first” network access service, e.g.); in which control module  3034  would simultaneously provide a “fourth” device  962  with access to network  1200  (as the “second” network access service, e.g.) if the “fourth” device had transmitted suitable access request data; and in which the “first” network access service would otherwise need to be provided by a “fifth” device (base transceiver station  320 , e.g.). In some contexts, for example, control module  3032  may implement the firewall between the “first” and “second” network access services. Alternatively or additionally, control module  3033  may be remotely configurable (implemented in an FPGA or non-volatile memory, e.g.) to permit an adjustment of the location of the firewall or otherwise control an allocation of resources in NAC unit  3030 . When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow  3500  permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device  7822  that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement various communication services  135 ,  136  (a phone call or portion thereof, e.g.) that would not otherwise exist. 
     With reference again to  FIG. 7B , there is shown a high-level logic flow  3600  disclosed in FIG. 36 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow  3600  describes an operation  25  of obtaining an indication of a first wireless communication service having been provided within a first service region by a first device at an earlier time (e.g. aggregation module  1981  receiving a notification that mobile device  7821  was at particular GPS coordinates three weeks ago at which time a wireless service had been established between device  7821  and network  1200  via access point  1830 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which access point  1830  is the “first” device; in which a notification arrived at aggregation module  1981  almost three weeks ago; in which aggregation module  1981  maintains status data about the availability of wireless services within a region depicted by map  2330 ; and in which the status data includes an estimated position of access point  1830  (determined by a detection module using GPS or other triangulation protocols, e.g.) at the earlier time (three weeks ago, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, timing data (derived from a signal from an instance of device  7821  traveling across WLAN zones and maintained in status data  2320 , e.g.) may indicate where Wi-Fi was operative as of three weeks ago. Alternatively or additionally, status data  2320  may include indications of “latest” wireless service status in several zones near the most-recent estimated position of access point  1830 . 
     Flow  3500  also describes an operation  34  of signaling a decision whether or not to indicate the first wireless communication service being operative within the first service region as an automatic and conditional response to an indication from a second device of the first wireless communication service having been operative within the first service region or not at a later time (e.g. response module  185  communicating to user  175  a decision that is responsive to a recent indication from device  7802  about one or more WLAN services being operative or inoperative within a vicinity of user  180 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which mobile device  7802  is the “second” device and has transmitted service availability information at the “later” time (yesterday, e.g.) of which some is maintained (in status data  2320 , e.g.); in which the decision is “negative” if it results in device  7801  displaying a map version indicating that service is unavailable within part of a region; in which the decision is “positive” if it results in device  7801  displaying a map version indicating that WLAN service is available throughout the region; and in which user  175  would otherwise have to traverse the first service region personally to discover whether or not WLAN service is still available there. Alternatively or additionally, such signals from various devices  2750 ,  7101 ,  7801  traversing the region may be used (1) by a response module configured to determine an indication of an approximate range of each access point  1810 ,  1820 ,  1830 ; (2) by a response module configured to determine an indication of what times of the day or week a WLAN access point goes offline; (3) by a response module configured to determine a Boolean indication whether or not one of the access points  1810  appears to be stationary; (4) by a response module configured to determine a Boolean indication of whether or not one of the access points is substantially isotropic; (5) by a response module configured to display via a map of a user interface a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective interpersonal communication; or (6) to perform such functions upon other devices described herein. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow  3600  permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device  7802  that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement various communication services  135 ,  136  (a phone call or portion thereof, e.g.) as described above. 
     In many contexts, a widespread implementation of one or more such flows  3200 ,  3300 ,  3400 ,  3500 ,  3600  into a wireless communications marketplace will entice cellular carriers to provide limited support for communications with anonymous devices (wearable articles operable to receive user data but not to send any user data, e.g.) or with devices belonging to non-subscribers as described herein. “Part cellular” calls as described above can facilitate offloading of a congested cellular network, for example. Interpersonal communications between users via alternatively technologies (direct interaction between a satellite  1293  and a satellite radio or mobile device  1000 ) may also achieve more widespread adoption. Moreover alternative wireless communication service providers (having much lower monthly subscription fees, e.g.) may enter the mobile marketplace on a larger scale. 
     Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, a cellular carrier subscriber (a telemarketer or other user  175 , e.g.) may be able to configure his account to provide an additional enticement (in minutes or other currency, e.g.) for a user of another device to accept a communication. In some variants a recipient of a call or message  137  may require such enticement, or may set a threshold specifying a quantification (a threshold of $1 per call, e.g.) below which no communication service  136  can be established. Some variants may include a third party sponsor (a retailer, e.g.) who provides free access to participants in a part-cellular communication whenever one of the parties to the communication is at a specific retail location (a point of sale, e.g.). 
     In some contexts, a cellular carrier may permit communication services to non-subscribers only in contexts of very low usage (implementing a guardbanded local network loading threshold, for example, one that interrupts such service earlier than the loading threshold imposed upon subscribers, so that subscribers will effectively receive preferential access via MSC  600 ). 
     Referring again to  FIG. 1  in light of scenarios described above, each such device may include an account update module  120  including or otherwise operably coupled (via a wireless linkage, e.g.) with other depicted components of apparatus  100 . Cohort identification module  142 , for example, may be configured to allocate one or more cost components to a subscriber account, as described above, as an automatic and conditional response to one or more communication services  135 ,  136  being initiated. In some variants, moreover, such services may not result in any cost component thereof being allocated to the non-subscribing user who participates in the communication. In some variants, service request handling module  143  may likewise allocate such cost components to a subscribing user as an automatic and conditional response to the non-subscriber&#39;s device initiating the communication service. This can occur in a context in which the subscribing user authorized such communication earlier, for example, or in response to a prompt provided at the time of the service request. Alternatively or additionally a service request handling module  144  (an anonymous incoming call handling module, e.g.) may initiate such communication services without having received any indication of a participating device  1000  being associated with any account. 
     In light of teachings herein, moreover, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for configuring a wearable article for user-initiated communication as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,340,476 (“Electronic acquisition of a hand formed expression and a context of the expression”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,234,262 (“Method of selecting a second content based on a user&#39;s reaction to a first content of at least two instances of displayed content”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,150,796 (“Methods and systems for inducing behavior in a population cohort”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,126,867 (“Returning a second content based on a user&#39;s reaction to a first content”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,104,892 (“Vision modification with reflected image”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,094,009 (“Health-related signaling via wearable items”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,065,404 (“Layering destination-dependent content handling guidance”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,930,389 (“Adaptive filtering of annotated messages or the like”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,733,223 (“Effectively documenting irregularities in a responsive user&#39;s environment”). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 41 , shown is an example of a system  4100  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A wearable article (earpiece  4167 , e.g.) is operably coupled with a handheld device  2760  that includes one or more instances of initiation modules  4171 ,  4172 ,  4173 ,  4174  or of response modules  4181 ,  4182 ,  4183 ,  4184 ,  4185 ,  4186 . When in use (by user  4101 , e.g.) device  2760  may be operably coupled via a first channel (comprising a WLAN or other wireless linkage  4151  and a wall-mounted device  4150  in region  4155  and a second linkage  4152 , e.g.) to one or more other devices in network  4190 . Alternatively or additionally, device  2760  may (optionally) be operably coupled via a second channel (comprising a wireless linkage  4161  and a device  4160  comprising a vehicle implementing a mobile hotspot in region  4165  and a second linkage  4162 , e.g.) to network  4190 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 42 , shown is another example of a system  4200  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Primary device  4210  (a vehicle or router or integrated circuit, e.g.) may include one or more instances of a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU)  4212  (comprising an internal cache  4215 , e.g.); of non-volatile memories  4241 ,  4242 ,  4243  (a phase-change memory  4231  or removable memory  4232 , e.g.); or of volatile memories  4261 ,  4262  (a cache  4255 , e.g.). In some variants, secondary device  4220  may include one or more instances of CPUs  4222 , non-volatile memories  4271 , volatile memories  4272 , or configuration units  4280 . One or both of primary and secondary devices  4210 ,  4220  may be a tablet computer or smartphone (device  2760 , e.g.) with an Android operating system and an antenna  4205  configure to facilitate a wireless linkage  4295  between them. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 3 , shown is another example of a system  300  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A circuit board  360  includes several integrated circuits (ICs)  361 ,  362 ,  363 ,  364 ,  365 ,  366 . Integrated circuitry  310  within IC  361 , for example, includes transistors  351 ,  352  each formed onto a single dielectric substrate  307 . Transistor  351 , for example, comprises a control terminal (a gate or base, e.g.) at node  342  and two end terminals (at nodes  341 ,  343 ) as shown. Such formation may be achieved by a series of several lithographic processes (chemical and thermal and optical treatments for applying and treating and etching dielectrics or dopants or other materials, e.g.). Many millions of such transistors  351 ,  352  are linked in a network of signal-bearing conduits  308  (forked or other serpentine signal traces, e.g.) according to intricate circuit designs formed of circuit blocks (initiation modules  4171 - 4174  and response modules  4181 - 4186 , e.g.) of a same general type as those described herein. Even among the relatively complex circuit blocks presented herein in context, however, many such blocks (excluding a variety of components such as antenna  4205 , e.g.) are linked by electrical nodes  341 ,  342 ,  343 ,  344  each having a corresponding nominal voltage level  311 ,  312 ,  313 ,  314  that is spatially uniform generally throughout the node (within a device or local system as described herein, e.g.). Such nodes (lines on an integrated circuit or circuit board  360 , e.g.) may each comprise a forked or other signal path (adjacent one or more transistors  351 ,  352 , e.g.). Moreover many Boolean values (yes-or-no decisions, e.g.) may each be manifested as either a “low” or “high” voltage, for example, according to a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS), emitter-coupled logic (ECL), or other common semiconductor configuration protocol. In some contexts, for example, one skilled in the art will recognize an “electrical node set” as used herein in reference to one or more electrically conductive nodes upon which a voltage configuration (of one voltage at each node, for example, with each voltage characterized as either high or low) manifests a yes/no decision or other digital data. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 4 , shown is another view of the mobile device  2760  introduced in  FIG. 41  in which a speaker  442 , camera  443 , and display  445  (touchscreen, e.g.) are visible. Also within device  2760  as shown is at least an integrated circuit  440  and a power source  441  (rechargeable battery, e.g.). A few of the electrical nodes thereof (comprising pads  435  along the sides as shown, e.g.) provide external connectivity (for power or ground or input signals or output signals, e.g.) via bonding wires, not shown. Significant blocks of integrated circuitry  310  on integrated circuit  440  include special-purpose modules  425 ,  428  (comprising a sensor or other hard-wired special-purpose circuitry as described below, e.g.); and different structures of memory  431 ,  432  (volatile or non-volatile, e.g.) interlinked by numerous signal-bearing conduits  308  (each comprising an internal node, e.g.) and otherwise configured as described below. See  FIGS. 6 &amp; 26 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 5 , shown is another example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented comprising a schematic view of an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC)  540 . ASIC  540  may (optionally) include a queue  570  (implemented in a volatile memory  4272 ,  432 , e.g.) comprising a series of items  571 ,  572 ,  573  (data blocks or tasks, e.g.) for handling (by a central processing unit  4222  or other core, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which ASIC  540  implements secondary device  4220  or IC  363 . Alternatively or additionally, ASIC  540  may include a queue  580  (implemented in non-volatile memory  431  or volatile memory  4272 , e.g.) comprising a series of items  581 ,  582 ,  583  (data blocks or tasks, e.g.) for processing (by a hard-wired special-purpose module  425  or general-purpose CPU  4212  configured to execute special-purpose software, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, special-purpose modules specifically identified herein (as circuitry in  FIGS. 6-14 , e.g.) may be implemented selectively by configuration (in a field-programmable gate array, e.g.) by a remote device (via a wireless linkage  4162 , e.g.) under various circumstances as described below. In some variants, for example, a gate array (comprising integrated circuit  366 , e.g.) may implement an FFT module  591 ,  592  or sorting module  594 ,  595  or detection module  598 ,  599  in a manifestation that is remotely reconfigurable. This can occur, for example, in a context in which other such functional implementations (a rarely used FFT module  592 , e.g.) are currently either omitted or manifested as software instead (as a module resident in a memory and executable by a core, e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 6 , shown is an example of a system  600  (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Control logic  610  may (optionally) include one or more instances of temperature sensors  608  having a corresponding state  618  (current temperature, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, control logic  610  may (optionally) include one or more instances of a general-purpose multimodal cores  635  configured to process instructions in one of the following modes: an “error-tolerant” operating mode  630  (relative to the other modes, e.g.) or a “high-latency” operating mode  631  (relative to the other modes, e.g.) or a “high-performance” operating mode  632  (relative to the other modes, e.g.). In some contexts a multimodal core  635  may also be configured to do nothing (in an “idle” or “off” mode, e.g.) or to operate in some other mode instead (a “normal” mode, e.g.). As further explained below, in some contexts, control logic  610  may likewise include one or more instances (1) of special-purpose circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the handheld device  671 ; (2) of special-purpose circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a configurable core to change core operating modes as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor  672 ; or (3) of special-purpose circuitry configured to cause a configurable core to draw from a data queue of a particular device  681 ,  682 ,  683 . 
     Several variants described herein refer to device-detectable “implementations” such as one or more instances of computer-readable code, transistor or latch connectivity layouts or other geometric expressions of logical elements, firmware or software expressions of transfer functions implementing computational specifications, digital expressions of truth tables, or the like. Such instances can, in some implementations, include source code or other human-readable portions. Alternatively or additionally, functions of implementations described herein may constitute one or more device-detectable outputs such as decisions, manifestations, side effects, results, coding or other expressions, displayable images, data files, data associations, statistical correlations, streaming signals, intensity levels, frequencies or other measurable attributes, packets or other encoded expressions, or the like from invoking or monitoring the implementation as described herein. 
     In some embodiments, a “state” of a component may comprise “available” or some other such state-descriptive labels, an event count or other such memory values, a partial depletion or other such physical property of a supply device, a voltage, or any other such conditions or attributes that may change between two or more possible values irrespective of device location. Such states may be received directly as a measurement or other detection, in some variants, and/or may be inferred from a component&#39;s behavior over time. A distributed or other composite system may comprise vector-valued device states, moreover, which may affect dispensations or departures in various ways as exemplified herein. 
     “Automatic,” “conditional,” “curated,” “detectable,” “handheld,” “rooted,” “bidirectional,” “effective,” “employed,” “explicit,” “in a vicinity,” “local,” “wireless,” “portable,” “mobile,” “recent,” “incrementally,” “multiple,” “objective,” “interpersonal,” “ad hoc,” “single,” “between,” “particular,” “isotropic,” “thermal,” “within,” “passive,” “partly,” “prior,” “proximate,” “associated,” “audible,” “received,” “remote,” “responsive,” “earlier,” “resident,” “later,” “operative,” “selective,” “specific,” “special-purpose,” “caused,” “stationary,” “between,” “matching,” “significant,” “common,” “unlocked,” or other such descriptors herein are used in their normal yes-or-no sense, not as terms of degree, unless context dictates otherwise. In light of the present disclosure those skilled in the art will understand from context what is meant by “vicinity,” by being “in” a region or “within” a range, by “remote,” and by other such positional descriptors used herein. Terms like “processor,” “center,” “unit,” “computer,” or other such descriptors herein are used in their normal sense, in reference to an inanimate structure. Such terms do not include any people, irrespective of their location or employment or other association with the thing described, unless context dictates otherwise. “For” is not used to articulate a mere intended purpose in phrases like “circuitry for” or “instruction for,” moreover, but is used normally, in descriptively identifying special purpose software or structures. 
     In some embodiments a “manual” occurrence includes, but is not limited to, one that results from one or more actions consciously taken by a device user in real time. Conversely an “automatic” occurrence is not affected by any action consciously taken by a device user in real time except where context dictates otherwise. 
     In some embodiments, “signaling” something can include identifying, contacting, requesting, selecting, or indicating the thing. In some cases a signaled thing is susceptible to fewer than all of these aspects, of course, such as a task definition that cannot be “contacted.” 
     In some embodiments, “status indicative” data can reflect a trend or other time-dependent phenomenon. Alternatively or additionally, a status indicative data set can include portions that have no bearing upon such status. Although some types of distillations can require authority or substantial expertise, many other types of distillations can readily be implemented without undue experimentation in light of teachings herein. 
     In some embodiments, “causing” events can include triggering, producing or otherwise directly or indirectly bringing the events to pass. This can include causing the events remotely, concurrently, partially, or otherwise as a “cause in fact,” whether or not a more immediate cause also exists. 
     Some descriptions herein refer to an “indication whether” an event has occurred. An indication is “positive” if it indicates that the event has occurred, irrespective of its numerical sign or lack thereof. Whether positive or negative, such indications may be weak (i.e. slightly probative), definitive, or many levels in between. In some cases the “indication” may include a portion that is indeterminate, such as an irrelevant portion of a useful photograph. 
     Some descriptions herein refer to a “device” or other physical article. A physical “article” described herein may be a long fiber, a transistor  351 , a submarine, or any other such contiguous physical object. An “article” may likewise be a portion of a device as described herein (part of a memory  432  or a speaker  442  of a smartphone, e.g.) or a mechanically coupled grouping of devices (a tablet computer with a removable memory  4232  and earpiece  4167  attached, e.g.) as described herein, except where context dictates otherwise. A communication “linkage” may refer to a unidirectional or bidirectional signal path via one or more articles (antennas  4205  or other signal-bearing conduit  308 , e.g.) except where context dictates otherwise. Such linkages may, in some contexts, pass through a free space medium or a network  4190 . See  FIGS. 17 &amp; 28 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 7 , shown is an example of a system  700  (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic  710  may (optionally) include one or more instances of activation modules  708 ,  709 ; of dual-mode cores  711 ,  712  (each having a lower-voltage operating mode  721  and a higher-voltage operating mode  722 , e.g.); or of other cores  731 ,  732 ,  733 . In some contexts event-sequencing logic  710  (implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540 , e.g.) may also include one or more instances of Boolean values  741 - 745  or of scalar quantities (a volume  706  or other quantification expressed in a plurality of electrical nodes, e.g.) each expressed as one or more bits. See  FIGS. 2, 3 , and  20 - 23  (depicting data-handling media suitable for expressing such individual values digitally, e.g.). Also as further explained below, in some contexts, event-sequencing logic  710  may include one or more instances (1) of special-purpose circuitry configured to signal a decision of how many cores to draw simultaneously from a single data queue of a mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the data queue crossing a volume threshold  751 ,  752  or (2) of special-purpose circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a configurable core to change core operating modes as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of a data queue crossing a volume threshold  761 ,  762 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 8 , shown is an example of a system  800  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic  810  may manifest one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to cause a sorting module in an FPGA of a mobile device to process a data component of a wireless signal after a configuration component of the wireless signal causes the FPGA to implement the sorting module  861 ,  862 ; (b) of an FPGA  870 ; (c) of configuration components  881  or data components  882  of a signal; or (d) of event-sequencing logic  710 . In some contexts, for example, FPGA  870  may be configured or reconfigured to implement a sorting module  875  (a bubble sort utility, e.g.) or other such utility modules as described below. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 9 , shown is an example of a system  900  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A password generation module  986  or other configuration unit  980  (implemented in network  990 , e.g.) is operably coupled to event-sequencing logic  910  via a wireless LAN or other linkage  995 . Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic  910  comprises one or more instances (a) of electrical nodes  921 ,  922 ,  923 ,  924 ,  925 ,  926 ,  927 ,  928 ; (b) of circuitry configured to obtain via an antenna configuration data establishing a security protocol  931 ,  932 ; or (c) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to indicate a wireless communication service provided within a region by a device as a response to an indication from another device of the wireless communication service being operative within the region  941 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 10 , shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic  1010  may manifest (as a general-purpose processing core executing software or in an FPGA  870  implemented in a mobile device, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to provide a network access service responsive to whether or not access request data satisfies a security protocol  1021 ,  1022 ,  1023 ; (b) of circuitry configured to establish both a wireless communication channel via a first device and from a second device and a wireless communication channel from the second device and via a third device  1031 ,  1032 ; or (c) of application modules  1041 ,  1042 ,  1043 ,  1044 . Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic  1010  (implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540 , e.g.) may include data-handling media  1050  containing one or more instances of commands  1068  or of patterns  1071 ,  1072  or of protocol implementation code  1088 ,  1089  or other device-executable code  1085 . In some variants, moreover, such logic may be operably coupled via linkage  1095  with a wide area network  1095  (comprising one or more satellites  1093 , e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 11 , shown is an example of a system  1100  (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic  1110  may manifest (as a general-purpose processing core executing software or in a mixed-signal or other FPGA  870  implemented in a mobile device, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of capture modules  1121  configured to capture audio clips; (b) of capture modules  1121  configured to capture video clips; (c) of global positioning system (GPS) modules  1122  configured to annotate wireless signals with position data; (d) of speech recognition modules; (e) of text-to-speech translation modules  1124 ; (f) of digital-to-analog converters  1125 ,  1126 ; (f) of decryption modules  1131 ,  1132 ; (g) of circuitry configured to signal a decision of how much user data to transmit via a communication channel responsive to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate of the communication channel exceeds a threshold  1141 ,  1142 ; (h) of decoding modules  1151 ,  1152 ; (i) of comparators  1161 ,  1162 ; (j) of aggregation modules  1171 ,  1172 ,  1173 ,  1174 ; or (k) of transmission modules  1181 ,  1182 ,  1183 ,  1184 . In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic  1110  may be implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 12 , shown is an example of a system  1200  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic  1210  may manifest (in an FPGA  870  or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to receive a wireless signal containing access request data  1201 ,  1202 ; (b) of circuitry configured to cause a first device to display a Boolean indication whether or not a second device is within a WLAN communication range of a third device without a bidirectional interpersonal communication existing between the first device and the second device  1221 ,  1222 ; or (c) of microphones  1217 . Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic  1210  may include data-handling media  1270  (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) containing a list  1250  of two or more records  1261 ,  1262 ,  1263 . Each such record may include one or more instances of avatars  1251  or other identifications  1252  (representing a person or device known to a user, e.g.); of status indications  1253 ,  1254 ; or of other such data  1255  as described below. In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic  1210  may be implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 13 , shown is an example of a system  1300  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic  1310  may include various memories  431 ,  432  or other data-handling media  1350  containing one or more instances of data  1301 ,  1302 ,  1303 ,  1304 ; of digitally expressed times  1311 ,  1312 ,  1313 ,  1314 ; of signals  1321 ,  1322 ,  1323 ,  1324 ; of services  1331 ,  1332 ,  1333 ,  1334 ,  1335 ; or of indications  1341 ,  1342 ,  1343 ,  1344 ,  1345  as described below. Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic  1310  may manifest (in an FPGA  870  or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to implement a firewall separating two or more network access services provided via a single device  1371  or (b) of circuitry configured to obtain an indication of a wireless communication service having been provided within a service region  1372 . In some variants, moreover, such logic may be operably coupled via linkage  1395  with a wireless local area network  1390  (comprising one or more servers  1396 , e.g.). In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic  1310  may be implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 14 , shown is an example of a system  1400  (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. User interface  1410  may include various data-handling media  1450  (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) containing one or more instances of decisions  1401 ,  1402 ,  1403 ,  1404 ,  1405 ; of results  1411 ,  1412 ,  1413 ; of digitally expressed volumes  1416 ; of intervals  1421 ,  1422 ,  1423 ; of notifications  1425 ; or of other such expressions  1431 ,  1432  (comprising sequences  1435  of symbols, e.g.). In some variants, moreover, user interface  1410  may manifest (in an FPGA  870  or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to obtain at one device an identifier of another device  1481 ; (b) of circuitry configured to signal an availability to participate in a telephonic communication responsive to a Boolean indication of a device being within a wireless communication range of another device  1482 ; or (c) of circuitry configured to detect an availability to participate in a telephonic communication responsive to a Boolean indication whether or not a device exceeded a boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval  1483 . In some contexts, for example, user interface  1410  may include a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 15 , shown is an example of a system  1500  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Device  1530  may communicate via linkage  1531  with a vehicle  1510  (optionally implementing a mobile hotspot, e.g.) operated by user  1502  or with a handheld device  2760  operated by user  2701  (via a WLAN or other wireless linkage  1536 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device  1530  may (optionally) include one or more instances of FPGA  1540  configured to facilitate network management as described below. In some contexts, for example, device  1530  may include a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 16 , shown is an example of a system  1600  (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Supervisor unit  1630  (instantiated in a vehicle  1510  or other device, e.g.) includes one or more instances of allocation modules  1641 ,  1642 ; of detection modules  1671 ,  1672 ,  1673 ,  1674 ; or of input modules  1681 ,  1682 ,  1683 ,  1684  as described below. In some contexts, for example, supervisor unit  1630  may include a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 17 , shown is an example of a system  1700  comprising a portable or other device  1750  in a communication network  1790  (an ad hoc or mesh network, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Numerous other devices  1752 ,  1754 ,  1756 ,  1758 ,  1760 ,  1762 ,  1764 ,  1766 ,  1768 ,  1770 ,  1772 ,  1774 ,  1776 ,  1778 ,  1780 ,  1782 ,  1784 ,  1786  (each comprising a cell tower or handheld device or vehicle or other portable device, e.g.) are linked via various passive-media linkages  1771  (through air or cables, e.g.). In various implementations, device  1750  may (optionally) include one or more instances of interface modules  1721 ,  1722 ,  1723 ,  1724 ,  1725 ,  1726 ; of response modules  1731 ,  1732 ,  1733 ,  1734 ,  1735 ,  1736 ,  1737 ,  1738 ,  1739 ; or of notification modules  1741 ,  1742 ,  1743 ,  1744 ,  1745 ,  1746  described below. Alternatively or additionally, one or more devices  1754 ,  1786  (implemented as supervisor units having access to one or more databases defining service characteristics pertaining to a local jurisdiction, e.g.) may be configured to send configuration data (extracted or otherwise derived from such databases, e.g.) manifesting wireless channel attributes (implementing power and frequency limitations relating to regulatory specifications, e.g.) to other devices in network  1790 , effectively specifying how they are to reconfigure themselves. See  FIGS. 18-23 . Such adjustments can be used for congestion relief (during peak usage times, e.g.), for example, or for other resource management as described herein. In some contexts, for example, such devices  1750  may include a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 18 , shown is an example of a system  1800  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic  1810  (implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540 , e.g.) may include one or more instances of FPGAs  1870  or of configuration components  1841  and data components  1842  of signals. In some contexts, for example, an FPGA  1820  may be configured or reconfigured to include a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) module  1823  or other event-sequencing structures as described below. Moreover some variants of event-sequencing logic  1810  may locally manifest one or more instances of circuitry configured to cause an FFT module in an FPGA of a mobile device to process a data component of a wireless signal after a configuration component of another wireless signal causes the FPGA to implement the FFT module  1881 ,  1882 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 19 , shown is an example of a system  1900  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Device  1910  (instantiated in one or more devices  1754 ,  1764  of network  1790 , e.g.) may include one or more instances of key press events  1931 ,  1932  or other such user input  1940  (manifested digitally, e.g.); of interpersonal communications  1961 ,  1962 ,  1963  (calls  1951  or sessions  1952  or dialogs  1953 , e.g.); of registration modules  1971 ,  1972 ,  1973 ,  1974 ; or of aggregation modules  1981 ,  1982 . Such devices  1910  may be operably coupled via a wireless or other linkage  1995  with telephone network  1990  (comprising one or more telephone switches  1996 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such devices  1910  may comprise one or more antennas  1905  (parabolic or shortwave or whip or Yagi-Uda or metamaterial antennas, for example, instantiated in  FIG. 17  mechanically coupled with most or all of devices  1750 ,  1752 ,  1754 ,  1756 ,  1758 ,  1760 ,  1762 ,  1764 ,  1766 ,  1768 ,  1770 ,  1772 ,  1774 ,  1776 ,  1778 ,  1780 ,  1782 ,  1784 ,  1786 ). In some contexts, for example, device  1910  may include a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     In some variants, primary device  4210  comprises a circuit board  360  upon which a metamaterial antenna system is constructed. In light of teachings herein, in fact, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing such antennas for use as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,299,967 (“Non planar metamaterial antenna structures”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,081,138 (“Antenna structure with antenna radome and method for rising gain thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,072,291 (“Compact dual band metamaterial based hybrid ring coupler”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,847,739 (“Antennas based on metamaterial structures”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,218,190 (“Waveguides and scattering devices incorporating epsilon-negative and/or mu-negative slabs”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,729 (“Phased array metamaterial antenna system”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/925,511 (“Metamaterial surfaces”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/220,703 (“Emitting and negatively refractive focusing apparatus methods and systems”); and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/156,443 (“Focusing and sensing apparatus methods and systems”). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 20 , shown is an example of a system  2000  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more media  2110  (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) may contain one or more instances of digitally expressed fractions  2011 ,  2012 ; of configuration data  2015 ; of coordinates  2021 ,  2022 ; of passwords  2035 ,  2036  or other access codes  2031 ,  2032 ; of signals  2051 ,  2052 ,  2053 ,  2054 ,  2055 ,  2056 ,  2057 ,  2058 ,  2059 ; of indications  2071 ,  2072 ,  2073 ,  2074 ,  2075 ,  2076 ,  2077 ,  2078 ,  2079 ; of thresholds  2081 ,  2082 ,  2083 ,  2084 ,  2085 ,  2086 ,  2087 ,  2088 ,  2089 ; of clips  2090  (of video or audio data, e.g.); or of rates  2091 ,  2092 ,  2093 ,  2094 ,  2095 ,  2096 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 21 , shown is an example of a system  2100  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more memories or other media  2110  may contain one or more instances of indicators  2102 ,  2103 ; of series  2125  of data blocks  2121 ,  2122 ,  2123  of auditory data  2120  (primarily having been obtained via a microphone, e.g.); or of series  2135  of data blocks  2131 ,  2132 ,  2133  of encrypted data  2130 . Other user data  2150  of interest for present purposes may (optionally) include other encrypted data  2130 , video or other image data; or computational modeling data (pertaining to meteorology or research, e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 22 , shown is an example of a system  2200  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more memories or other media  2210  (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) may comprise one or more instances of informational models  2301 ; of images  2251 ; of decisions  2221 ,  2222 ,  2223 ,  2224 ,  2225 ,  2226 ,  2227 ,  2228 ; of indications  2271 ,  2272 ,  2273 ,  2274 ,  2275 ,  2276 ,  2277 ,  2278 ,  2279 ; of services  2281 ,  2282 ,  2283 ,  2284 ; of phone numbers  2285  or other such identifiers  2286 ; of percentages  2291 ,  2292 ,  2293 ; of hardware description language (HDL or VHDL, e.g.) expressions  2296 ,  2297 ; or of counts  2298 ,  2299 . Image  2251 , for example, depicts virtual regions  2255 ,  2265  relating to actual regions  4155 ,  4165  as generally described below (with reference to  FIG. 41 , e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 23 , shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more memories or other media  2310  may comprise one or more instances of informational models  2301 ; of status data  2320 ; of maps  2330  or segments  2337  thereof; or of versions  2361 ,  2362 ,  2363  (of an image or other expression of model  2301 , e.g.). In some contexts, for example, such status data may (optionally) include one or more records  2327 ,  2328 ,  2329  each comprising one or more expressions (1) of times  2311 , (2) of positions  2312 , or (3) of shape-descriptive information  2313  relating to one or more wireless service regions or devices. Several non-overlapping zones  2351 ,  2352 ,  2353 ,  2354 ,  2355 ,  2356  are shown. Some zones  2351 ,  2354 ,  2355  together form a circular region centered at position  2341 , containing several identified positions  2347 ,  2348 ,  2349 , and having a radius  2345  representing a real-world radius on the order (within an order of magnitude) of ten meters or of one kilometer. Another version  2362  depicts position  2349  outside a region (comprising zones  2352 ,  2354 ) of service  1331 . Another version  2363  depicts position  2349  within a region (comprising zones  2351 ,  2352 ,  2354 ,  2355 ) of service  1331  but not within an overlapping region (comprising zones  2353 ,  2355 ) of service  1332 . Such versions depict various states (including Wi-Fi service outages, e.g.), modes of model updates, or cost-indicative depictions of such services as generally described below (with reference to  FIG. 31 , e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 24 , shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic  2410  may bear (as a digital expression, e.g.) one or more instances of decryption code  2425  or signals  2430 . In a context in which event-sequencing logic  2410  includes one or more digital or analog speedometers  2420  (instantiated in one or more vehicles  1510  or other mobile devices  2760 ,  4160 , e.g.), for example, such signals may comprise data indicating a ground speed or a geographic position (of GPS module  1122  or other event-sequencing logic  1110 ,  2410 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such signals may include one or more instances of control parameters  2431  or of data segments  2432 ,  2433 ,  2434  (user data, e.g.). In some variants, moreover, event-sequencing logic  2410  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1772  of network  1790 , e.g.) may manifest (in an FPGA  870 ,  1540 ,  1870  or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a control component of the wireless signal  2471 ,  2472  or (b) of circuitry configured to cause first content of a wireless signal to pass through a first memory of an integrated circuit if second content of the wireless signal satisfies a first criterion and otherwise to cause the first content to pass through a second memory of the integrated circuit  2481 ,  2482 . In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic  2410  may be implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 25 , shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic  2510  (instantiated in one or more devices  1758 ,  1768 ,  1778  of network  1790 , e.g.) may include (in an FPGA  870 ,  1540 ,  1870  or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to detect a series of service region departure events  2501 ; (b) of circuitry configured to implement a specific positional model that represents both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator  2502 ; (c) of circuitry configured to decrease a dataflow through a wireless communication channel incrementally  2503 ; (d) of circuitry remote from a user configured to signal a result via a device local to the user  2504 ; (e) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to transmit any user data via a first communication channel  2505 ; (f) of circuitry configured to transmit user data via an ad hoc network  2506 ; (g) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to adjust a latency threshold for user data  2507 ; (h) of circuitry configured to map a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective intercommunication  2508 ; or (i) of circuitry configured to compare a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold  2509 . In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic  2510  may be implemented in a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 26 , shown is an example of a system  2600  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Detection unit  2610  may (optionally) include one or more instances of processing modules  2641 ,  2642 ,  2643 ,  2644 ; of configuration modules  2671 ,  2672 ,  2673 ,  2674 ,  2675 ,  2676 ,  2677 ,  2678 ; or of a charging sensor  2607  configured to indicate a charging state  2617  (as a Boolean or digital scalar expression, e.g.) of a battery  2615 . In some variants, moreover, detection unit  2610  may manifest (on a circuit board  360  or as software executed by a processing core, e.g.) one or more instances of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a configurable core to draw from a first data queue in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery  2681  or of circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a portable device as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery  2682 . In some contexts, for example, detection unit  2610  may be implemented in or operably coupled with a circuit board  360  or ASIC  540  as described above. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 27 , shown is an example of a system  2700  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. At least two parallel communication channels  2770 ,  2780  are established between endpoint devices  2750 ,  2760  so that an interpersonal communication can occur between device users  1501 ,  2701 . This permits a signal  2757 , for example, to travel via linkage  2767  and via one or more intermediate devices  2771 ,  2772  comprising channel  2770 . Likewise a signal  2758  can travel via linkage  2768  and via one or more intermediate devices  2781 ,  2782  comprising channel  2780 . In some variants, moreover, ASIC  540  may be configured either (a) so that channel  2770  includes queue  570  and so that channel  2780  includes queue  580  or (b) so that two or more channels  2770 ,  2780  are simultaneously processed each through a respective integrated circuit (instances of gate arrays or other IC&#39;s  365 ,  366  mounted on circuit board  360 , e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 32 , shown is a high-level logic flow  3200  of an operational process. Operation  28  describes establishing both a wireless communication channel via a first device and from a second device and a wireless communication channel from the second device and via a third device (e.g. initiation modules  4171 ,  4172  respectively creating parallel communication channels  2770 ,  2780  from device  2760 , each including at least one wireless linkage  2767 ,  2768 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  2771  (instantiated in one or more devices  1772 ,  1774  of network  1790 , e.g.) is the “first” device; in which device  2760  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1756 ,  1774  of network  1790 , e.g.) is the “second” device; in which device  2782  is the “third” device; in which channel  2770  comprises one or more devices  2771 ,  2772  via which signals  2057 ,  2757  can travel (to and from device  2760 , e.g.); in which channel  2780  comprises one or more devices  2781 ,  2782  via which signals  2058 ,  2758  can likewise travel in both directions; and in which such channels  2770 ,  2780  exist simultaneously. In a telephonic implementation, for example, such channels  2770 ,  2780  may both bear digitized auditory data  2120  simultaneously, optionally including a particular component of user data  2150  (block  2123 , e.g.) passing simultaneously through a primary channel  2770  (as signal  2757 , e.g.) and redundantly through another channel  2780  (as signal  2758 , e.g.). 
     Operation  32  describes signaling a decision of how much user data to transmit via the wireless communication channel from the second device and via the third device responsive to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate of the wireless communication channel via the first device and from the second device exceeds a failure rate threshold (e.g. allocation module  1641  causing one or more transmission modules  1181 ,  1182  to increase a fraction  2012  of digitized auditory data  2120  transmitted via channel  2780  as an incremental response to an indication  2076  that a data block delivery failure rate  2091  of channel  2770  exceeds a threshold  2081 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the incremental response causes a partial reduction in a volume of data block delivery failure events; in which data block delivery failure rate  2091  describes a percentage  2291  of data blocks  2121 ,  2122 ,  2123  transmitted via linkage  2767  that do not pass via an antenna of device  2771  or that do not reach device  2750  within a permissible latency threshold  2082 ; in which a volatile memory  4262  of supervisor unit  1630  (instantiated in one or more devices  1766 ,  1772  of network  1790 , e.g.) implements several media  2010 ,  2110 ,  2210  as described above; and in which such wireless communication channel allocations would otherwise be made in a crude or unduly computation-intensive fashion (by conventional signal strength or load balancing or bit error rate indicia, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, a latency threshold  2082  for digitized voice data communication routing may be less than 0.5 seconds and the effective threshold  2081  applied to data block delivery failure rate  2091  may be less than 5%. Alternatively or additionally, one or both such thresholds  2081 ,  2082  may effectively depend upon an indication  2075  of one or more attributes of channel  2780  (a data block delivery failure rate  2092  of linkage  2768 , e.g.) or other such determinants as described herein. In some contexts, for example, allocation module  1641  may be configured to close channel  2780  when a traffic volume through channel  2780  becomes low enough (after several iterations of operation  32 , e.g.). 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a timing or other comparison as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,325,901 (“Methods and apparatus for providing expanded telecommunications service”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,321,727 (“System and method responsive to a rate of change of a performance parameter of a memory”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,320,261 (“Method and apparatus for troubleshooting subscriber issues on a telecommunications network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,315,622 (“Motion adaptive communications device and integrated circuits for use therewith”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,579 (“Multi-mode mobile communication device with motion sensor and methods for use therewith”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,295,395 (“Methods and apparatus for partial interference reduction within wireless networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,290,509 (“Deactivation system and method for a transferable device”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,264,953 (“Resilient data communications with physical layer link aggregation, extended failure detection and load balancing”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,224,349 (“Timed fingerprint locating in wireless networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,195,478 (“Network performance monitor”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,184,580 (“Data packet communication scheduling in a communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,881,992 (“Methods and systems for processing and managing corporate action information”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,853,268 (“GPS enabled cell phone location tracking for security purposes”). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 28 , shown is an example of a system  2800  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A computer  2810  in an office  2820  includes a display  2815 , a microphone  2817 , a keyboard, a speaker, and a mouse. An identifier (phone number  2285 , e.g.) of a remote mobile device  2870  or its user  2880  are available (listed, e.g.) at computer  2810 . When mobile device  2870  is within a wireless local area network (WLAN) communication range  2866  of one or more WLAN routers  2860  (instantiated in one or more devices  1768 ,  1784  of network  1700 , e.g.), an interpersonal communication (a video chat via displays  2815 ,  2875  or telephone call, e.g.) can occur via computer  2810  and mobile device  2870  and via linkages  2895 ,  2896  with network  2890  as shown. In some contexts, moreover, status information concerning mobile device  2870  is available at computer  2810  even before such communication is initiated. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 33 , shown is a high-level logic flow  3300  of an operational process. Operation  24  describes obtaining at a first device an identifier of a second device (e.g. registration module  1971  maintaining a local instance of contact list  1250  within computer  2810  including a phone number  2285  or similar identification  1252  associated with user  2880 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which computer  2810  is the “first” device (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1752  of network  1790 , e.g.); in which mobile device  2870  is the “second” device; and in which a telephone switch  1996  or server  1396  associates phone number  2285  with one or more mobile devices  2870  owned by user  2880  (instantiated in one or more devices  1768 ,  1782 ,  1786  of network  1790 , e.g.). 
     Operation  30  describes causing the first device to display a Boolean indication whether or not the second device is within a wireless local area network communication range of a third device without a bidirectional interpersonal communication existing between the first device and the second device (e.g. notification module  1744  triggering computer  2810  to display a positive status indication  1254  signifying that mobile device  2870  is within a wireless LAN communication range  2866  without first establishing a telephone call  1951  or similar bidirectional interpersonal communication  1961  between computer  2810  and mobile device  2870 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which wireless LAN communication range  2866  is established as an operating range of one or more WLAN devices (wireless LAN router  2860 , e.g.); in which display  2815  presents such an indication  1254  in conjunction with other information about user  2880  (in record  1261 , e.g.); in which a user  4101  of computer  2810  can initiate a telephone call  1951  or similar interpersonal communication  1961  to user  2880  via computer  2810  in response to one or more such indications  1253 ,  1254 ; in which such telephone calls  1951  are cost effective (free of charge to user  2880 , e.g.); and in which user  2880  would otherwise be unable or displeased to participate in such communication (incurring a significant roaming charge, e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 29 , shown is an example of a system  2900  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A mobile device  2910  (a communication-enabled vehicle  1510  or handheld device, e.g.) meanders along a path  2901  through a series of positions  2903 ,  2904 ,  2905 ,  2906 ,  2907 ,  2908 ,  2909  at each of which there is an apparent wireless service boundary  2961 ,  2971 ,  2981 . Even if the devices that provide the wireless service zones  2960 ,  2970 ,  2980  in a region  2955  are unknown or unavailable or transient (by hot spot movements or intermittencies, e.g.), a rate at which some such crossings occur constitutes a useful availability determinant as described below. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 34 , shown is a high-level logic flow  3400  of an operational process. Operation  27  describes obtaining a Boolean indication of whether or not a first device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval, the recent time interval being less than an hour (e.g. detection module  1671  generating a comparison result  1411  as a direct or indirect Boolean indication  2271  that a maximum crossing rate threshold  2084  was greater than an average rate  2094  at which device  2910  had apparently crossed wireless service zone boundaries  2961 ,  2971 ,  2981  in a region  2955  during a particular time interval  1421 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which aggregation module  1171  has received a series of several indications  2071 ,  2072 ,  2073 ,  2074  of crossing events; in which one or more of such indications  2071  was not “qualifying” (because it did not pertain to an event within time interval  1421 , e.g.); in which time interval  1421  is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which detection module  1671  (comprising comparator  1161 , e.g.) compares a count  2299  of such other indications  2072 ,  2073 ,  2074  with threshold  2084 . In an implementation of detection module  1671  in which threshold  2084  is four, for example, a count  2299  of three crossings (e.g. at positions  2904 ,  2905 ,  2906 ) will result in a negative indication  2271  (signifying infrequent crossings, e.g.). In another context (in which only service region departures are “qualifying,” e.g.) detection module  1671  may generate a positive indication  2271  (signifying frequent crossings, e.g.) by applying a nominal threshold  2084  of two against a count  2299  of three (signifying registration module  1974  detecting departure events at position  2905  from zone  2970  and at position  2908  from zone  2980  and at position  2909  from zone  2970 , e.g.). Other variants of detection module  1671  may perform operation  27  using a variety of protocols. A crossing rate threshold  2084  may be effectively adapted by applying one or more offsets or multipliers to count  2299 , for example, or by including other quantitative modifiers as described herein. Alternatively or additionally, detection module  1671  may implement conjunctive determinants (a Boolean value  744  configured to enable indication  2271  conditionally, e.g.); disjunctive determinants (a Boolean value  745  configured to override indication  2271  conditionally, e.g.); or other such modes of implementing comparisons as indicated herein. 
     Operation  33  describes signaling an availability to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication conditionally, partly based on the Boolean indication whether or not the first device exceeded the wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within the recent time interval and partly based on a Boolean indication of the first device being within a wireless communication range of a second device (e.g. notification module  1743  causing a headset or display  2875  to provide a user  1502 ,  2880  with an automatic and conditional decision  1404  as to whether or not device  2910  is currently available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication  1962 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  2910  is the “first” device; in which device  4160  is the “second” device; in which wireless service zone  2960  comprises a wireless communication range of device  4160 ; in which decision  1404  will be positive (signaling availability, e.g.) if device  2910  remains continuously within wireless service zone  2960  for longer than time interval  1421 ; in which time interval  1421  is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which much more resource-intensive modeling (requiring frequent monitoring of satellite  1093  by GPS module  1122 , e.g.) would otherwise be required to determine whether the first device is currently viable for such a communication. In some variants, moreover, determining availability by another mode (purely by a ground speed of device  2910  being low enough, e.g.) might generate false negatives unduly (failing to recognize viable ongoing availability in a context of traveling within region  4165  and alongside device  4160  for an extended period, e.g.). Decision  1404  may (optionally) be signaled by a sound (a chord, e.g.) or by a word (“ready,” e.g.) or other displayed symbol (a light-emitting diode coming on, e.g.), for example, or by other such expressions  1431  played or displayed at user interface  1410  (instantiated in one or more devices  1756 ,  1758  of network  1700 , e.g.). In some embodiments notification module  1743  may signal a positive decision  1404  by establishing the bidirectional interpersonal communication  1962  (comprising a video chat session  1952  or similar dialog  1953 , e.g.), moreover, or may signal a negative decision  1404  by doing nothing. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 30 , shown is an example of a system  3000  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Two networks  3080 ,  3090  are each operably coupled with a communications tower  3085  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1770  of network  1700 , e.g.) and with a network access control (NAC) unit  3030  (implementing a wireless router, e.g.) comprising several control modules  3031 ,  3032 ,  3033 ,  3034 . One such control module  3031  interacts with device  2750  and conditionally provides a first network access service (to network  3080 , e.g.). One or more other devices (computer  3060 , e.g.) are likewise conditionally provided (by one or more other corresponding control modules  3034 , e.g.) with network access service(s) as described below. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 35 , shown is a high-level logic flow  3500  of an operational process. Operation  26  describes obtaining via a first device configuration data establishing a first security protocol (e.g. input module  1684  receiving via one or more linkages  4295 ,  995  a secure access code  2031  effectively deeming one or more data patterns  1071  to be “acceptable”). This can occur, for example, in a context in which secondary device  4220  includes data storage medium  2010  (non-volatile memory  4271 , e.g.); in which such linkages include a signal-bearing conduit (an antenna  4205 ,  1905  or optical cable, e.g.) as the “first” device, via which configuration unit  980  transmits access code  2031  to supervisor unit  1630 ; and in which access code  2031  includes a current password  2035  provided by password generation module  986 . In some contexts, for example, a secondary device  4220  remote from supervisor unit  1630  may be configured to perform such transmissions regularly (daily, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more instances of configuration unit  980  may implement an initial security-protocol-implementing data pattern  1071  (during manufacture of supervisor unit  1630 , e.g.) for limiting access to one or more services  2281 ,  2282  (network resources, e.g.) prior to any reconfiguration of supervisor unit  1630 . 
     Operation  29  describes obtaining via a second device a wireless signal containing access request data (e.g. interface module  1721  receiving a wireless signal  1323  containing access request data  1301 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which primary device  4210  includes event-sequencing logic  1010 ,  1310  (instantiated in one or more devices  1782 ,  1784  of network  1700 , e.g.); in which the “second” device is an antenna  1905  operably coupled to device  2750  or to NAC unit  3030  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1768 ,  1774  of network  1790 , e.g.); and in which device  2750  transmits wireless signal  1323  as a response to input  1940  (key press events  1931 ,  1932  or voice commands  1068 , e.g.) from user  2701  (initiating a telephone call  1951 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device  2750  may transmit access request data  1301  (requesting to establish an open channel  2770 , e.g.) as an automatic response to device  2750  entering a zone  2970  (comprising a wireless operating range of device  2772 , e.g.). 
     Operation  31  describes signaling a decision whether or not to provide a first network access service via a third device responsive to whether or not the access request data in the wireless signal satisfies the first security protocol (e.g. registration module  1972  signaling a decision  1401  to provide device  2750  with a service  1333  that includes access to network  3080  via control module  3031  as an automatic and conditional response to application module  1041  determining that access request data  1301  matches security-protocol-implementing data pattern  1071 ). 
     Operation  35  describes signaling a decision whether or not to provide a second network access service via the third device responsive to whether or not the access request data satisfies a second security protocol, the third device implementing a firewall between the first network access service and the second network access service (e.g. allocation module  1642  signaling a conditional decision  1402  not to provide an entity that transmits access request data  1301  with a service  1334  that includes access to network  3090  as an automatic and conditional response to application module  1042  determining that access request data  1301  does not match security-protocol-implementing data pattern  1072 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  2750  is the “second” device; in which NAC unit  3030  is the “third” device; in which control module  3031  provides the “second” device with access to network  3080  (as the “first” network access service, e.g.); in which control module  3034  would simultaneously provide a “fourth” device (computer  3060 , e.g.) with access to network  3090  (as the “second” network access service, e.g.) if the “fourth” device had transmitted access request data  1302  matching data pattern  1072 ; in which NAC unit implements event-sequencing logic  810 ,  1810  (instantiated in one or more devices  1774 ,  1784  of network  1790 , e.g.) and media  1350 ,  1450 ; and in which the “first” network access service would otherwise need to be provided by a “fifth” device (tower  3085 , e.g.). In some contexts, for example, control module  3032  may implement the firewall between the “first” and “second” network access services (access to networks  3080 ,  3090  respectively, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, control module  3033  may be remotely configurable (implemented in an FPGA  870 ,  1540 ,  1870  or non-volatile memory  4243 , e.g.) to permit an adjustment of the location of the firewall or otherwise control an allocation of resources in NAC unit  3030 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 31 , shown is an example of a system  3100  in which one or more technologies may be implemented. At an earlier time, router  3101  provided WLAN or other wireless service to any devices  3180  (communication-enabled vehicles  1510  or handheld devices, e.g.) that were within zone  3121 . Other routers  3102 ,  3103  in the region  3155  provide ongoing wireless service within respective disjoint zones  3122 ,  3123  as shown, and both continue to communicate with network  3190 . Another device  3160  obtains wireless service status versions  3162 ,  3163  (indicating service availability within zone  3121 , e.g.) with corresponding timing data  3165  as described below. 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a firewall as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,327,431 (“Managing configurations of a firewall”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,316,435 (“Routing device having integrated MPLS-aware firewall with virtual security system support”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,300,532 (“Forwarding plane configuration for separation of services and forwarding in an integrated services router”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,230,516 (“Apparatus, system, and method for network authentication and content distribution”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,209,400 (“System for data routing in networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,121,648 (“Adaptive beamforming configuration methods and apparatus for wireless access points serving as handoff indication mechanisms in wireless local area networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,065,357 (“Output management system and method for enabling access to private network resources”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,059,650 (“Hardware based parallel processing cores with multiple threads and multiple pipeline stages”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,024,482 (“Dynamic firewall configuration”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,018,856 (“Director device with visual display arrangement and methods thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,004,971 (“Method and system for scaling network traffic managers using connection keys”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,924,927 (“Distributed functionality in a wireless communications network”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,804,954 (“Infrastructure for enabling high quality real-time audio”). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 36 , shown is a high-level logic flow  3600  of an operational process. Operation  25  describes obtaining an indication of a first wireless communication service having been provided within a first service region by a first device at an earlier time (e.g. aggregation module  1981  receiving a notification  1425  that mobile device  3180  was at coordinates  2021 ,  2022  three weeks ago at which time a wireless service  2283  had been established between device  3180  and network  3190  via router  3101 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which  FIG. 31  generally depicts the “earlier” time; in which the “first” service region comprises either zone  3121  or a subset of it that excludes zone  3122 ; in which router  3101  is the “first” device (instantiated in one or more devices  1768 ,  1770  of network  1790 , e.g.); in which notification  1425  arrived at aggregation module  1981  almost three weeks ago; in which aggregation module  1981  maintains status data  2320  about the availability of wireless services within a region  3155  depicted by map  2330 ; and in which status data  2320  includes an estimated position  2341  of router  3101  (determined by a detection module  1672  using GPS or other triangulation protocols, e.g.) at the earlier time  1311  (three weeks ago, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, timing data  3165  (derived from a signal  1322  from an instance of device  3180  traveling across zones  3121 - 3123  and maintained in status data  2320 , e.g.) may indicate that as of three weeks ago, service  1331  was operative in zones  3121 ,  3122  and service  1332  was operative in zone  3123 . Alternatively or additionally, status data  2320  may (optionally) include indications  2278 ,  2279  of “latest” wireless service status in several zones  2351 - 2355  near the most-recent estimated position  2341  of router  3101 . 
     Operation  34  describes signaling a decision whether or not to indicate the first wireless communication service being operative within the first service region as an automatic and conditional response to an indication from a second device of the first wireless communication service having been operative within the first service region or not at a later time (e.g. response module  4185  communicating to user  4101  a decision  1403  that is responsive to a recent indication  2275  from device  2870  about one or more wireless services  1331  being operative or inoperative within zone  3121 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which mobile device  2870  is the “second” device and has transmitted a signal  1323  at the “later” time  1313  (yesterday, e.g.) from within zones  3121 ,  3122  (corresponding roughly to map position  2347 , e.g.) of which some is maintained (in status data  2320 , e.g.); in which the decision  1403  is “negative” if it results in device  2760  displaying status version  3162  (indicating that service  1331  is unavailable within part of zone  3121 , e.g.); in which the decision  1403  is “positive” (manifested as an instance of a voltage level  313  above a voltage threshold  2085 , e.g.) if it results in device  2760  displaying status version  3163  (indicating that service  1331  is available throughout zone  3121 , e.g.); and in which user  4101  would otherwise have to traverse the first service region personally to discover whether or not service  1331  is still available there. In some contexts, for example, such a decision  1403  will dictate whether device  2760  will display image version  2362  (negatively indicative of service  1331  at position  2349 , e.g.) or image version  2363  (positively indicative of service  1331  at position  2349 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such signals from various devices  4160 ,  2760 ,  2870 ,  3180  traversing region  3155  may be used (1) by a response module  4181  configured to determine an indication  1341  of an approximate range of each router  3101 - 3103 ; (2) by a response module  4182  configured to determine an indication  1342  of what times of the day or week one of the routers  3102  goes offline; (3) by a response module  4183  configured to determine a Boolean indication  2273  whether or not one of the routers  3101  appears to be stationary; (4) by a response module  4184  configured to determine a Boolean indication  2272  of whether or not one of the routers  3103  (instantiated in one or more devices  1784 ,  1786  of network  1700 , e.g.) is substantially isotropic; (5) by a response module  4186  configured to display via a map  2330  of a user interface  1410  a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective interpersonal communication  1963  via the user interface  1410 ; or (6) to perform such functions upon other devices described herein. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 37 , a system  3700  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  3710  (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  921 - 928  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of assignment modules  3711 ,  3712 ; of GPS or other location modules  3721 ,  3722  (implemented in FPGA  870 , e.g.); of circuitry  3751  configured to obtain an indication of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device; of circuitry  3752  configured to obtain an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device; or of circuitry  3753  configured to signal a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to WLAN service and partly based on a communication between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device as further described below. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 38 , a wearable assembly  3810  supports event-sequencing logic  3830  operably coupled via network  3890  with other event-sequencing logic  3860 . Wearable assembly  3810  may (optionally) be worn by a user via various supports  3840  described herein (eyewear  351 , clip unit  353 , headset  355 , a shoe, wristwear  358 , or other such wearable articles, e.g.) configured to support various event-sequencing logic directly or indirectly. In some contexts, for example, support  3840  may have a mechanical linkage with one or more light-emitting diodes  3851 , earpieces  4167 , antennas  3852 , or other output components. In particular, each instance of event-sequencing logic  3830  may include one or more instances of transistor-based circuitry  3831 ,  3832 ,  3833  or other special purpose integrated circuitry  310 . For example, circuitry  3831  may comprise an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  921 - 928  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to receive a “first” wireless signal  3855  indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary (zone boundary  7850 , e.g.) via one or more antennas  1905 ,  3852 . In a context in which wearable assembly  3810  is implemented as described above (e.g. in one or more of device  1000  or device  1750  or device  1910 ), for example, such circuitry may also include a transmitter/receiver module  1014  configured to receive signal  3855  via one or more antennas  1905 ,  3852 . Circuitry  3832  may likewise have an event-sequencing structure configured to extract WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from the signal  3855  via a signal processor (e.g. signal processing module  1016 ) of the wearable assembly. Alternatively or additionally, event sequencing logic  3830  may include transistor-based circuitry  3833  having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal (to one or more users  180 ,  4101  or to network  3890 , e.g.) via an output component (e.g. a speaker  442  or light-emitting diode  3851  or display  445  or antenna  3852 ) of the wearable assembly  3810 . On a display  445  such data may be conveyed as a map segment  2337 , for example, showing where device  7802  is with a color indicative of WLAN zone  7114 ,  7214  (within which the prospective interpersonal communication may be free of charge, e.g.) that is different from that of a “cell only” zone  7115  (with which a non-subscribing user  178  may get a “free ride” at the expense of a subscribing user  175  who has agreed to accept a charge resulting non-subscribing user  178  initiating a communication without the benefit of WLAN service, e.g.). Likewise a speaker or LED  3851  may be sufficient notification  1425  (a medium-pitch “beep” sound or “entering Wi-Fi service zone” articulation or LED activation to signify entering WLAN zone  7214  or a lower-pitch “boop” sound or LED deactivation to signify leaving WLAN zone  7214 , e.g.) to notify a user of wearable assembly  3810  of such crossings. In some variants, moreover, such notifications may be provided to users who are approaching a boundary (with an audible message like “warning: you are about to pass out of Wi-Fi service space” or similar visible message  137 , e.g.). 
     In various embodiments described herein, moreover, wearable assembly  3810  may include or otherwise interact with other event-sequencing logic  710 ,  810 ,  910 ,  1010 ,  1110 ,  1210 ,  1310 ,  1810 ,  2410 ,  2510 ,  3710 ,  3860  (e.g. via network  3890  or other wireless linkages  1771 ,  4161 ). Event-sequencing logic  3860 , for example, may include circuitry  3861  configured to obtain a first location estimate describing a first location of a first device; circuitry  3862  configured to obtain first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first device obtained the first location estimate; and circuitry  3863  configured to signal a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first device obtained the first location estimate. The operation of event-sequencing logic  3860  is further described below, especially with reference to access map server  2300  (depicted in  FIG. 2 ) and model  2301  (depicted in  FIGS. 23 and 44 ). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 39 , a system  3900  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  3910  (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  921 - 928  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry  3931  configured to obtain a preference indication via a mobile device, the preference indication (in many instances) being either a first option or a second option; of circuitry  3932  configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication between first and second mobile devices as a conditional response to the first option; of circuitry  3933  configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a bidirectional communication between first and second mobile devices as a conditional response to the second option; or of circuitry  3934  configured to signal a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to an account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to the second option as further described below. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 40 , a system  4000  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  4010  (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  921 - 928  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of decision modules  4061 ,  4062 ,  4063 ,  4064  or of configuration modules  4081 ,  4082 ,  4083 ,  4084  as further described below. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 43 , a system  4300  is shown comprising one or more media  4310  bearing one or more instances of values  4321 ,  4322 ,  4323 ,  4324 ,  4325 ,  4326 ,  4327 ; of data structures  4330 ; of accounts  4335 ,  4336 ; of decisions  4341 ,  4342 ,  4343 ,  4344 ,  4345 ,  4346 ,  4347 ; of indications  4351 ,  4352 ,  4353 ,  4354 ,  4355 ,  4356 ,  4357 ; of messages  4370  (comprising broadcasts  4361 , pages  4362 , short message service texts  4363  or other components  4364 ,  4365  described below, e.g.); of phone numbers  4371  or other such device identifications  4372 ,  4373 ; of protocols  4381 ,  4382 ,  4383 ,  4384 ,  4385 ; of authorizations  4395 ; or of other such data components. For example such media  4310  may include one or more non-volatile memories  4271 , volatile memories  4272 , or moving data storage mediums (having memory cells configured as magnetized or other readable zones of a rotating disc, e.g.), or other such data-handling media in widespread use. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 44 , a system  4400  is shown comprising one or more media  4410  bearing one or more instances of positional models  2301 ,  2302 ,  2303  (comprising connectivity-indicative maps  2330 , e.g.); of model numbers  4411 , device names  4412 , or other such device identifiers  4415 ,  4416 ; of signals  4460 ; of software-implemented or other digitally expressed criteria  4471 ,  4472 ,  4473  (for acceptance or rejection or other data evaluation, e.g.); of apps  4481 ,  4482 ,  4483 ; of control parameters  4489 ; or of other such data components. For example such media  4310  may, in some embodiments, bear signals that include one or more instances of labels  4431 ,  4432 ; of status data  4433 ; of routing data  4435 ; of position estimates  4441 ,  4442 ,  4443 ,  4444  (expressed as coordinates, e.g.); or of provenance data  4451 ,  4452 ,  4453 ,  4454 ,  4455 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 45 , a system  4500  is shown comprising one or more media  4510  bearing one or more instances of records  4511 ,  4512 ; of indications  4531 ,  4532 ,  4533 ,  4534 ,  4535 ; of decisions  4541 ,  4542 ,  4543 ,  4544 ,  4545  or other values  4551 ,  4552 ,  4553 ; of accounts  4555 ,  4556 ; or of durations  4560 . In some contexts, for example, each such record may include one or more instances of allocations  4501 , of balances  4502 , of days  4503  or other intervals, of user or other customer identifiers  4504  (account numbers or names, e.g.), or of device identifiers  4505  (serial numbers, e.g.) by which one or more accounts described herein may be associated with a user/device. In some contexts, moreover, some or all such device-executable or data items borne on media described above may comprise firmware  4595  (implemented in a transistor-based non-volatile memory  4241  or as specific circuits described herein and configured by an original equipment manufacturer, e.g.). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 46 , a system  4600  is shown comprising one or more data-handling media  4610  bearing one or more instances of results  4601 ,  4602 ,  4603 ,  4604 ,  4611 ,  4612 ,  4613 ,  4614 ; digitally expressed criteria  4621 ,  4622 ,  4623 ,  4624 ; voltages  4631 ,  4632 ,  4633 ,  4634 ; authorizations  4664 ,  4665 ,  4666 ,  4667 ,  4668 ; or other such metrics  4680 . Such informational data may be manifested on a node set (e.g. of one or more nodes  241 - 244 ) of an integrated circuit  361 , for example, as a configuration of one or more respective voltage levels  311 - 314 . See  FIGS. 47-50  (depicting useful node sets). Likewise each node set may comprise media  4610  in which other kinds of indicia (one or more levels  4693 , e.g.) may manifest such information. (Insofar that voltage levels  311 - 314  and fluid levels  4693  are analogous, this example will prove useful to some readers.) A data node  4690  literally containing a fluid, for example, may manifest either a positive state  4681  (as any fluid level  4693  above a threshold  4691 , e.g.) or a negative state  4682  (as any fluid level  4693  below a threshold  4692 , e.g.). A fluid inlet valve  4671  may allow fluid to enter (as a “current,” e.g.) so that data node  4690  transitions from positive state  4682  to negative state  4681 . Conversely a fluid outlet valve  4673  may allow fluid to exit so that data node  4690  transitions from negative state  4681  to positive state  4682 . In some contexts, for example, one or more instances of fluid sensors  4672  may be configured to detect a fluid level configuration of or transitions in a data node set manifesting one or more decisions  1401 - 1405 ,  2221 - 2228 ,  4341 - 4347 ,  4541 - 4545  or other indications, as further described below. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 47 , a system  4700  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  4710  (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry  4712  configured to establish a conference call among several devices; of circuitry  4715  configured to establish a communication via at least a first device and a second device responsive to receiving a charge authorization from a user of a third device; of circuitry  4717  configured to assign a cost component of a communication to an account associated with a first mobile unit conditionally, in response to receiving a charge authorization from the first mobile unit before receiving any charge authorization from any other unit; or of circuitry  4749  configured to manifest a communication by establishing a direct wireless linkage between a cell tower and a particular device partly based on receiving a charge authorization and partly based on the particular device not having WLAN service. Also as described below, circuitry  4712  may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4742  (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry  4715  may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4745  upon which a configuration may manifest such information. Circuitry  4717  may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4747  upon which a configuration may manifest such information. Circuitry  4719  may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4749  upon which a configuration may manifest such information. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 48 , a system  4800  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  4810  (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry  4891  configured to obtain a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data; of circuitry  4892  configured to obtain a first position estimate of the rooted communication device; or of circuitry  4893  configured to signal a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. Also as described below, circuitry  4891  may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4881  (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry  4892  may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4882  upon which a configuration may manifest such information. Circuitry  4893  may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4883  upon which a configuration may manifest such information. See  FIG. 64 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 49 , a system  4900  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  4910  (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry  4921  configured to obtain an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device or of circuitry  4922  configured to respond to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. Also as described below, circuitry  4921  may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4931  (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry  4922  may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  4932  upon which a configuration may manifest such information. See  FIG. 63 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 50 , a system  5000  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  5010  (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry  5021  configured to signal a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service or of circuitry  5022  configured to respond to a negative decision by signaling another, similar decision whether or not to establish the communication. Also as described below, circuitry  5061  may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  5051  (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry  5062  may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set  5052  upon which a configuration may manifest such information. See  FIG. 65 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 51 , a system  5100  is shown comprising a primary unit  5110  operably coupled with a secondary unit  5120  (within a single device or via a long-distance signal path in respective embodiments, e.g.). Primary unit  5110  may (optionally) include one or more instances of validation modules  5111 ,  5112 ,  5113 ,  5114  or other input modules  5171 ,  5172 ,  5173 ,  5174  as further described below. Secondary unit  5120  (implemented in FPGA  870 , e.g.) may likewise include one or more instances of transmission modules  5121 ,  5122 ; of tagging modules  5151 ,  5152 ; or of estimation modules  5161 ,  5162  as further described below. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 52 , a system is shown in a context like that of  FIG. 2 , one that highlights interpersonal communication between/among users  175 ,  178 ,  179 . As shown, passive linkages  5261 ,  5262  (wireless signal paths, e.g.) operably couple device  7102  with one or more devices  7802 ,  7822  via network  5290  (comprising network  1200  of  FIG. 2 , e.g.). A user interface (touch screen or speech recognition module, e.g.) of device  7102  presents two or more options  5281 ,  5282 ,  5283  to user  175  via menu  5280 , as further described below. 
     With reference now to  FIG. 59 , shown is a high-level logic flow  5900  of an operational process. Operation  371  describes obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device (e.g. input module  5171  receiving a digital value  4327  signaling that a subscribing user  175  of device  7102  has expressed his preference by indicating a first menu option  5281 ). This can occur, for example in a context in which digital value  4327  is “1” or “no”; in which the “first” device (device  7102 , e.g.) includes implements device  1000  (including a user interface  1017  having a touchscreen display  2875 , button, or speech recognition module  1123  available to user  175 , e.g.) from which input module  5171  receives digital value  4327 ; and in which input module  5171  selects option  5281  in lieu of one or more other options  5282 . In some contexts, for example, user  175  may subscribe to a cellular service carrier (Verizon, e.g.) for which an account  4335  has a current balance (comprising a digital value  4326  expressed in units of dollars or minutes, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, input module  5171  may be configured to accept a default digital value  4327  as a conditional response to receiving no reply from user  175  for a prescribed interval (10-30 seconds, e.g.), signifying his apparent preference (not authorizing an extra charge, e.g.). 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for obtaining user preferences as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,352 (“Method and apparatus for communicating via virtual office telephone extensions”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,316,394 (“Interactive media guidance application with intelligent navigation and display features”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,513 (“Automated mobile system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,301,564 (“Interacting with user at ATM based on user preferences”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,280,913 (“Systems and methods for management of contact information”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,925,250 (“Reuse of a mobile device application in a desktop environment”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,743,334 (“Dynamically configuring a web page”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,664,720 (“Method and product of manufacture for the recommendation of optimizers in a graphical user interface for mathematical solvers”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,650,319 (“Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,593,812 (“Technique for effective navigation based on user preferences”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,567,305 (“Method for selecting preference channel and digital TV using the same”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,522,992 (“Technique for effective navigation based on user preferences”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,516,092 (“System and method for performing purchase transactions utilizing a broadcast-based device”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,344,063 (“Networked disposal and sample provisioning apparatus”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,305,079 (“Method and apparatus for communicating with one of plural devices associated with a single telephone number”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,260,203 (“Method and apparatus for routing calls based on identification of the calling party or calling line”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,245,913 (“Handset mode selection based on user preferences”). 
     Operation  374  describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device (e.g. transmission module  5122  transmitting a message  4370  to or from device  7102  manifesting an affirmative decision  4342  resulting from user  175  having indicated option  5281 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a negative decision  4343  (disabling transmission module  5122  to prevent the unidirectional communication, e.g.) would have resulted if user  175  had selected another option  5282 ; in which message  4370  comprises a page  4362  (providing a phone number  4371  or other identification  4372  of the second mobile device to device  7102 , e.g.); in which system  5100  resides in network  5290 ; and in which at least a portion (component  4364 , e.g.) of message  4370  travels via wireless linkages  5261 ,  5262  (to or from mobile device user  178 , e.g.). 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a unidirectional communication as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,391,930 (“Method and system for using user-selected alert patterns”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,352,872 (“Geographic location notification based on identity linking”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,346,879 (“Detecting conflicts in email messages”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,243,887 (“Identification of notifications in a mass notification system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,238,869 (“Lifesaver personal alert and notification device”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,145,566 (“Method and system for notifying customers of transaction opportunities”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,961,076 (“Methods and apparatuses for remote control of vehicle devices and vehicle lock-out notification”). 
     Operation  376  describes signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device (e.g. configuration module  4082  including at least the first and second devices in a telephone call  1951 , text chat, or other such dialog  1953  as a conditional response to an indication  4356  of user  175  having selected option  5282  at menu  5280 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user  175  causes device  7102  to be configured so as to authorize charges in advance for such communications (by accessing menu  5280  before dialog  1953 , e.g.) and in which event-sequencing logic  4010  resides in device  7102  or network  5290 . Alternatively or additionally, configuration module  4081  may query user  175  (such as by transmitting a message  4370  like “do you accept the extra charge for this session?” and taking an affirmative response as user  175  selecting the “second” option  5282 , e.g.). 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for establishing a bidirectional communication as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,358,975 (“Signaling over cellular networks to reduce the Wi-Fi energy consumption of mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,295,352 (“Process for delivering a video stream over a wireless bidirectional channel between a video encoder and a video decoder”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,244,228 (“Method and apparatus for providing a mobile wireless local area network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,160,304 (“Interactive systems and methods employing wireless mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,049,664 (“Multi-band, multi-channel, location-aware communications booster”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,004,556 (“Conference link between a speakerphone and a video conference unit”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,761,505 (“System, method and computer program product for concurrent performance of video teleconference and delivery of multimedia presentation and archiving of same”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,254,123 (“Control of a wireless conference telephone system”). 
     Operation  378  describes signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device (e.g. assignment module  3712  implementing a decision  4344  to assign a cost component  122  to account  4335  that is conditioned upon user  175  having authorized the charge by indicating option  5282  at menu  5280 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which one or more instances of event-sequencing logic  3710 ,  4010  reside in primary unit  5110 ; in which cost component  122  is a premium cost for a premium service above that which is provided to user  175  at a “normal” cellular telephone service subscription rate (monthly or per-minute, e.g.); in which cost component  122  would not be assigned to account  4335  if user had not selected the “second” option  5282 ; in which system  5100  resides in device  7102  or network  5290 ; and in which users  178 ,  179  would otherwise be unable to benefit from resources of the cellular service carrier (to initiate or respond to wireless communications, e.g.) without both maintaining active cellular service subscriptions. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 53 , a system is shown in a context like that of  FIG. 2 , one that highlights interpersonal communication between/among handheld devices  7102  and other mobile devices  1000  such as portable wireless nodes  5300 . In some contexts, for example, node  5300  may be implemented as a wearable assembly  3810  (on a headset  355  or garment for a support or as jewelry, e.g.) that includes a microphone  5301  or other sensor  5302 . Line-of-sight or other passive wireless linkages  5361 ,  5362 ,  5363  operably couple each of such devices with network  5390  (a hybrid network that includes network  1200  of  FIG. 2 , e.g.) as shown. Alternatively or additionally, device  1000  may be operably coupled via a radio frequency linkage  5364  (Bluetooth, e.g.) with node  5300 . In some contexts, device  1000  may have been reconfigured (using one or more unlocking protocols, e.g.) to accommodate a subscriber identification module  5311  or other such components unlike those provided by its original manufacturer (aftermarket components, e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 60 , shown is a high-level logic flow  6000  of an operational process. Operation  373  describes obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device (e.g. tagging module  5152  receiving a phone number  4371 , serial number, or other identification  4373  of one or more mobile communication devices  1000  that have undergone an unlocking procedure). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  1000  was originally a carrier-locked phone, usable only via a first cellular service provider (Verizon, e.g.); in which user  177  has used one or more unlocking or jailbreaking protocols  4381 - 4383  to adapt device  1000  so that it can be used via a second cellular service provider by enabling device  1000  to accept a substitute network access component (an off-brand subscriber identification module  5311  or software utility, e.g.) even after an original wireless service subscription has ended; and in which secondary unit  5120  resides in network  5390  or in device  7102 . In some contexts, for example, an unlocking protocol  4383  may include hardware and software modifications to a communication device or other device with wireless communication capabilities (to allow the use of the device with one or more off-brand carriers, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, a jailbreak protocol  4381  may include a specific modification (a hardware unlock or software unlock to adapt firmware in the device, e.g.) implemented with special purpose tools (a jailbreak app  4481  obtained from Cydia or Icy, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device  1000  may have been configured (via one or more unlock/jailbreak protocols  4382 , e.g.) to be usable without any cellular service provider (via WLAN service, e.g.). 
     Operation  377  describes obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device (e.g. validation module  5111  generating an indication  4352  that an account  4335  associated with device  7102  is currently available). This can occur, for example, in a context in which account  4335  is associated with the “second” mobile device  7102  and maintained by a current cellular service provider; in which account  4335  has a current balance (comprising a digital value  4326 , e.g.); in which account update module  120  is configured to post a cost component  121  (an ordinary per-minute or per-message cost for communications that include device  7102 , e.g.) to account  4335  irrespective of whether the unlocked communication device  1000  has ever had access to any WLAN service; and in which primary unit  5110  is co-located with secondary unit  5120 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which a cellular service provider associated with the “second” mobile device  7102  (Verizon, e.g.) charges that cost component  121  for all such communications with user devices that are not in that provider&#39;s network (but in which in-network communications are free for device  7102  to initiate or accept, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, validation module  5111  may obtain indication  4352  from a trusted third party (who lists current subscribers or other wireless signaling devices in a region  3155 , e.g.). 
     Operation  379  describes signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device (e.g. decision module  4063  implementing a decision  4346  not to authorize account update module  120  to charge account  4335  a cost component  122  for a communication unless device  1000  is in “free ride” zone  7815  and carrierless during the communication). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the unlocked device  1000  gets a “free ride” at the expense of user  175  when necessary for the communication; in which user  175  authorized both the ordinary cost component  121  and the as-needed premium cost component  122  described above to be charged to account  4335 ; in which the premium cost component can be avoided by waiting for device  1000  to re-enter WLAN service space; and in which user  175  could not otherwise eliminate the need for unlocked device  1000  to remain within or re-enter WLAN service space (WLAN zone  7214 , e.g.). In some contexts, for example, user  175  can configure decision module  4063  to perform operation  379  by authorizing a cost component  122  to be posted to account  4335  conditionally for a particular communication (conference call, e.g.) or duration (month, e.g.), so that such posting will only occur if necessary (1) to establish the communication with or from unlocked device  1000  while it is in “free ride” zone  7815  or (2) to continue the communication with unlocked device  1000  as it passes out of WLAN service (across a zone boundary  7150 ,  7850  from a WLAN zone  7114 ,  7214  into a “cell-only” or other “free ride” zone, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, user  175  can effectively configure one or more additional instances of decision module  4063  to perform operation  379  by listing additional communication participants (teleconference invitees, e.g.) of whom one or more uses an unlocked/jailbroken communication device (in which the “first” mobile device implements one or more wireless-capable devices  1000 ,  1750  as described above, e.g.). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 54 , a system is shown in a context like that of  FIG. 2 , one that highlights connectivity-indicative data aggregation. A first reporting unit  5421  (implemented in base station controller  520 , e.g.) relays position-indicative data (from one or more devices  7802  operated by users  178 ,  179  of respective devices  7802 ,  7822  as shown, e.g.) via wireless linkage  5461  to network  5490 . Likewise other reporting units  5422 ,  5423  relay such information from other users  177 ,  180  via other wireless linkages  5462 ,  5463  as shown. Network  5490  includes a control unit  5410  configured by technician  5401  and including a map update module  5415 . In some contexts, for example, control unit  5410  implements a server from which one or more control parameters  4489  (thresholds or other values that influence how local devices operate, e.g.) or apps  4481 - 4483  may be distributed (downloaded by device users, e.g.). In some variants, for example, reporting unit  5422  may reside in network interface  2400  of FIG.  2 . Likewise reporting unit  5423  may reside in a peer device of an ad hoc network (in device  1750  of  FIG. 17 , e.g.). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 61 , shown is a high-level logic flow  6100  of an operational process. Operation  372  describes obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device (e.g. estimation module  5161  using a timing or triangulation protocol to compute two or more scalar values  4323 ,  4324  quantitatively describing past or present position  2348  of device  7802 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which values  4323 ,  4324  comprise a latitude and a longitude; in which device  7802  is the “first” device; in which device  7802  includes event sequencing logic  5110  and one or more media  4310 ,  4410  from which messages  4370  or other signals  4460  are received; and in which wireless connectivity status data  4433 ,  4432  (indicating one or more WLAN access points or other wireless devices  1750 ,  1752 ,  1754 ,  1756  having been online or not, e.g.) is provided with or implicitly associated with one or more such position estimates  4441 - 4444  (describing positions where device  7802  has actually been, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, system  5100  may be implemented aboard device  7802  or in reporting unit  5421 . Alternatively or additionally, primary unit  5110  may include an input module  5172  configured to perform operation  372  by receiving such signals  4460  by wireless transmission (from secondary units  5120  in nearby mobile devices  7801 ,  7821  or satellites  1293  or base transceiver stations  330 , e.g.), optionally including one or more position estimates  4441 - 4444  comprising 3D expressions (configured each to include one or more digital indications  4353  of elevation, e.g.). 
     Operation  375  describes obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate (e.g. one or more validation modules  5113 ,  5114  extracting from signal  4460  one or more instances of provenance data  4451 - 4457  indicating how device  7802  obtained scalar values  4323 ,  4324  describing its position). This can occur, for example, in a context in which transmission module  5121  includes an explicit label  4432  (such as “cell identification” or protocol “5”) identifying a protocol (of extraction or computation, e.g.) by which location module  3721  obtained an estimated position of device  7802 ; in which at least some position estimates  4441 ,  4442 ,  4443  are each provided (in signal  4460 , e.g.) with one or more instances of provenance data  4451 - 4455 ; in which such provenance data serves a greater purpose than merely identifying and locating device  7802 ; and in which several estimate-obtaining protocols (conventions that govern the interaction of components with or within network  5490  to facilitate position estimation, e.g.) are identifiable. Alternatively or additionally, such provenance data may be provided by special-purpose circuitry (secondary unit  5120 , e.g.) that includes estimation module  5161 . 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for generating and using provenance data as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,412,946 (“Trustworthy timestamps and certifiable clocks using logs linked by cryptographic hashes”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,406,753 (“System and method for generating a location estimate using uniform and non-uniform grid points”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,369,871 (“System and method for mobile device self-location”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,346,282 (“Method and system for locating mobile stations using call measurement data”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,284,100 (“Providing indoor location, position, or tracking of a mobile computer using sensors”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,265,655 (“Procedure to increase position location availability”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,301,375 (“Interface for a GPS system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,068,836 (“Method and device for transferring an ongoing communication in which a mobile terminal is involved between a first and a second base stations and wherein one of the base stations is located in a moving conveyance”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,032,149 (“Tasking and reporting method and implementation for wireless appliance location systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,519,373 (“System and method for geo-location of mobile appliances using diverse standard tasking and reporting”). 
     Operation  380  describes signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate (e.g. decision module  4062  transmitting an affirmative decision  4351  that invokes map update module  5415  using digital values  4323 ,  4324  to describe where device  7802  was as an automatic and conditional response to operation  375  and operation  372  both having occurred). This can occur, for example, in a context in which technician  5401  had previously configured validation module  5114  (implemented in FPGA  870  or non-volatile memory  4271 , e.g.) to apply one or more evaluation criteria  4471 - 4478  to such provenance data; in which instances of event-sequencing logic  3710 ,  4010  reside in each reporting unit  5421 - 5423 ; in which map update module  5415  selectively updates one or more informational models  2301 ,  2302  according to the outcome of such application (using one or more worthy position estimates  4441 - 4443  and rejecting one or more other position estimates  4444 , e.g.); and in which such models would otherwise be updated too late (manually, e.g.) or erroneously (using tainted position data, e.g.). In some variants, for example, control unit  5410  may be operable to configure reporting units  5421 - 5423  or consumer devices operated by users  178 ,  180  (by transmitting control apps  4481 - 4483  or parameters  4489  via wireless linkages  5461 - 5463 , e.g.). See  FIG. 2 . Alternatively or additionally, in some embodiments, control unit  5410  may be configured as an access map server  2300  (as depicted in  FIG. 2 , e.g.) operable to include such event-sequencing logic  3710 ,  4010 . 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for updating a map as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,442,482 (“Method and system for an emergency location information service (E-LIS)”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,417,215 (“Method for positioning of wireless medical devices with short-range radio frequency technology”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,412,590 (“In-store wireless shopping network using hand-held devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,340,578 (“Methods and apparatus for enhanced coexistence algorithms in wireless systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,315,203 (“Mapping in a multi-dimensional space”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,223,012 (“System and method for conveying object location information”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,185,137 (“Intensity-based maps”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,184,656 (“Control channel negotiated intermittent wireless communication”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,180,328 (“Wireless manager and method for configuring and securing wireless access to a network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,149,113 (“Apparatus and method for conveying location event information based on access codes”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,000,314 (“Wireless network system and method for providing same”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,925,995 (“Integration of location logs, GPS signals, and spatial resources for identifying user activities, goals, and context”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,848,292 (“Method of dynamically populating a neighbor list in a wireless communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,821,986 (“WLAN infrastructure provided directions and roaming”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,716,585 (“Multi-dimensional graphical display of discovered wireless devices”). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 55 , a system  5500  is shown in a context like that of  FIG. 2 , one that highlights interpersonal communication between/among handheld devices  2750  and other mobile devices  1000 . The depiction is simplified by including BTS  310  and several other network subsystems within network  5590 . 
     Referring now to  FIG. 56 , a system  5600  is shown comprising event-sequencing logic  5610  (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  921 - 928  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of processors  5605 ; of decision modules  5611 ,  5612 ,  5613 ,  5614 ; of configuration modules  5621 ,  5622 ,  5623 ,  5624 ; or response modules  5631 ,  5632 ,  5633 ,  5634  as further described below. 
     With reference now to flow  6200  of  FIG. 62  and to other flows described herein, in some variants, one or more operations depicted may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described herein. These operations  6252 ,  6255 ,  6257 ,  6259  respectively invoke one or more instances of circuitry  4742 ,  4745 ,  4747 ,  4749  as depicted in  FIG. 47  above. 
     Referring now to  FIG. 57 , a system  5700  is shown in a context like that of  FIG. 2 , one that highlights a zone boundary. Users  175 ,  178  are interacting or attempting to interact via respective linkages  5762 ,  5763  with network  5790  while user  178  approaches or crosses zone boundary  7850 , as depicted in  FIG. 2 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 63 , shown is a high-level logic flow  6300  of an operational process. Operation  382  describes obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device (e.g. input module  5174  receiving a customer identifier  4504  or other digital value  4551  identifying an account  4555  supported by a wireless service provider). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a particular record  4511  associates a user  175  with one or more device identifiers  4505  identifying his communication-capable device(s); in which one such device is the “first mobile” device  7102  and is uniquely identified (with a digital device identifier  4505 , e.g.) in record  4511 ; in which primary unit  5110  resides in device  7102  or network  5790 ; and in which one or more such devices  7102  are authorized to post charges (for minutes used or service invocations, e.g.) to the account  4555 . In some contexts in which network  5790  includes mobile switching center  600  of  FIG. 2 , for example, the service provider may configure and maintain such records  4511 ,  4512  (resident in a subscriber status database  680 , e.g.) to provide user  175  with an allocation  4501  of metered resources (minutes or instances per month, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more such devices  7102  (implementing device  2760 , e.g.) or accounts  4555  may be shared by several users  101 ,  1501 ,  4101 . See  FIGS. 4, 27, 45, and 57 . 
     In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for cost allocations as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,380,188 (“System and method for temporarily accessing another user&#39;s service”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,532 (“Method and system for enabling personalized shared mobile phone usage”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,086,239 (“Infrastructure for wireless telecommunication networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,045,957 (“Computer program product to indicate a charge for a call”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,965,997 (“System and method to support multiple wireless accounts for a given subscriber”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,813,716 (“Method of providing information to a telephony subscriber”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,788,927 (“Financing party payment for calls with a wireless subscriber”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2012/0202454 (“System and method for authorizing and monetizing collect cellular telephone calls”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2011/0191205 (“Portable communicator”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2009/0227229 (“Method and system for enabling personalised shared mobile phone usage”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2008/0167045 (“Service handover control apparatus using an end-to-end service handover and method using the apparatus”); and U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2005/0190902 (“Network support for billing customer calls according to tailored billing lists”). 
     Operation  384  describes responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device (e.g. response module  5634  responding to one or more handover indications  4531 ,  4532  by subtracting a cost component  122  from balance  4502  that depends upon when device  7801  apparently crossed one or more zone boundaries  7150 ,  7850 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which handover indication  4532  resulted from device  7801  having passed from “free ride” zone  7815  (within which the current user  175  of the “first” mobile device  7102  effectively incurs a surcharge for a linkage  5762  via BTS, e.g.) into WLAN zone  7214  (within which the current user  175  of the “first” mobile device  7102  incurs no such surcharge because linkage  5762  is subsequently provided via an access point  1820  unrelated to the subscription in lieu of BTS  330 , e.g.) while the communication service (communication  1961 , e.g.) was in progress; in which the communication service cost component  122  has a utility value  4552  (expressed in minutes or cents, e.g.) computed as K×duration  4560 ; in which K=1 or in which K=8 cents per minute or in which K depends upon one or more other determinants described herein (a digitally expressed time  1313  or location indication  4533 , e.g.); in which such response modules reside in network  1200  or in device  7102  (in firmware  4595  or other non-volatile memory  4271  therein, e.g.); and in which such connectivity would otherwise require device  7801  to have a conventional wireless carrier subscription. In some contexts, for example, such event-sequencing logic  1310 ,  5610  may be implemented as an aftermarket app  4482  executable by a multimodal core  635  or other processor  5605  in network  5790 , for example. Alternatively or additionally, response module  5634  may be configured to determine cost component  122  as a function of a handover indication  4531  that resulted from device  7801  having passed into “free ride” zone  7815  (within which the current user  175  of the “first” mobile device  7102  effectively incurs a surcharge for a linkage  5762  via BTS  330 , e.g.) from a WLAN zone  7114 ,  7214  (within which the current user  175  of the “first” mobile device  7102  incurred no such surcharge because linkage  5762  was provided in lieu of BTS  330 , e.g.) while the communication service was in progress. This can occur, for example, in a context in which duration  4560  effectively describes how long the communication service was supported (using cellular frequencies as described herein, e.g.) by BTS  330 . 
     In light of teachings herein, moreover, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing various wireless linkages as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,509 (“Detection, communication and control in multimode cellular, TDMA, GSM, spread spectrum, CDMA, OFDM WiLAN and WiFi systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,259,822 (“Polar and quadrature modulated cellular, WiFi, WiLAN, satellite, mobile, communication and position finder systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,249,256 (“Method for providing fast secure handoff in a wireless mesh network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,248,968 (“Method and apparatus for providing mobile inter-mesh communication points in a multi-level wireless mesh network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,223,694 (“Enhanced information services using devices in short-range wireless networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,219,312 (“Determining speed parameters in a geographic area”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,200,243 (“Mobile television (TV), internet, cellular systems and Wi-Fi networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,184,656 (“Control channel negotiated intermittent wireless communication”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,169,311 (“Wireless transmission system for vehicular component control and monitoring”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,165,091 (“Efficient handover of media communications in heterogeneous IP networks using LAN profiles and network handover rules”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,125,896 (“Individualizing a connectivity-indicative mapping”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,111,622 (“Signal routing dependent on a node speed change prediction”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,098,753 (“Infrared, touch screen, W-CDMA, GSM, GPS camera phone”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,646,712 (“Using a signal route dependent on a node speed change prediction”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,988 (“Context-sensitive query enrichment”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/252,206 (“Signal routing dependent on a loading indicator of a mobile node”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/221,421 (“Heading dependent routing”); and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/221,396 (“Heading dependent routing method and network subsystem”). 
     Referring now to  FIG. 58 , a system  5800  is shown in a context like that of  FIGS. 2 &amp; 31 , one that highlights a user  177  interested in learning about current WLAN connectivity (e.g. in zones  3121 ,  3122 ) in region  3155 . Even in a context in which user  177  does not have access to a conventional wireless subscription, a wireless carrier may nonetheless be willing to facilitate user  177  getting audible instruction  5891  or a local connectivity map segment  5892  (relating to router  3102  and zone  3122 , e.g.) via network  3190  and a wireless linkage  5886  with tower  5885 . 
     With reference now to  FIG. 64 , shown is a high-level logic flow  6400  of an operational process. Operation  383  describes obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data (e.g. configuration module  5621  receiving an authorization  4665  for such data to be presented via mobile device  2750  from someone who does not own either end of linkage  5886 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which an equipment manufacturer (Apple, e.g.) originally configured mobile device  2750  so that only premium apps could be installed thereon; in which mobile device  2750  was later rooted (using a current jailbreak protocol or other exploits, e.g.) so that other apps could be installed thereon; in which one or more application modules  1041 - 1044  currently residing on mobile device  2750  thereby have root privileges; in which the “first” party is user  177 ; in which the “second” party owns tower  5885 ; and in which authorization  4665  is provided by “K-Corporation,” an owner of access map server  2300  (as a “third” party, e.g.). See  FIG. 2 . Alternatively or additionally, one or more such authorizations  4665  may come from third parties who subscribe to a wireless carrier service and whose devices are associated (by virtue of a call placement through a wireless carrier or “friends list” designation, e.g.) with device  2750 . 
     In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a limited access service as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,443,420 (“System for communicating with a mobile device server”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,341,246 (“Personal content server apparatus and methods”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,266,313 (“Live media subscription framework for mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,166,524 (“Method and system for the authentication of a user of a data processing system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,060,109 (“Authorized location reporting mobile communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,844,684 (“Live media captioning subscription framework for mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,693,752 (“Mobile commerce framework”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,421,477 (“Real-time media captioning subscription framework for mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,373,384 (“Short message (SMS) storage system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,353,016 (“Call intercept methods, such as for customer self-support on a mobile device”). 
     Operation  386  describes obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device (e.g. estimation module  5162  generating or receiving two or more coordinates  2021 ,  2022  that roughly describe the current location of mobile device  2750 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which medium  2010  and event-sequencing logic  1110 ,  4010 ,  5610  (including GPS module  1122  and one or more modules of  FIG. 51 , e.g.) reside in mobile device  2750  or network  3190 . In some variants, moreover, estimation module  5162  may be invoked in response to authorization  4665 . Alternatively or additionally, in some contexts, estimation module  5162  may include a differential global positioning service or wide area augmentation system. In some variants, moreover, such coordinates may manifest geospatial coordinates (indicating which floors of a building have WLAN service suitable for use by mobile device  2750  according to a three-dimensional map  2330 , e.g.). 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for characterizing a position as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,301,159 (“Displaying network objects in mobile devices based on geolocation”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,295,853 (“Method and system for refining accuracy of location positioning”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,269,618 (“Method and system for remotely monitoring the location of a vehicle”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,165,600 (“System and method for advertising to a Wi-Fi device”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,155,077 (“Active mode internet protocol gateway relocation in a partial meshed deployment”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,108,145 (“Downloading map segment(s) to a cell phone based upon its GPS coordinates and mobility”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,916,071 (“System and method for determining a reference location of a mobile device”). 
     Operation  387  describes signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization (e.g. decision module  4064  effectuating a decision  4544  that prevents one or more apps  4482  resident in mobile device  2750  from displaying the relative positional indication  4535  unless configuration module  5621  received authorization  4665 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user  177  was able to install a trial app  4482  from K-Corporation (by virtue of having rooted mobile device  2750 , e.g.); in which app  4482  usually provides navigational guidance (turn-by-turn navigation or other audible instruction  5891 , e.g.) specifying how to reach the nearest online WLAN zone  3122  but occasionally (during three randomly-selected hours each day, e.g.) implements the decision  4544  to present a “please subscribe to K-Corporation map service” message instead; and in which app  4482  updates its local connectivity map segment  5892  frequently irrespective of authorization  4665  (e.g. whenever mobile device  2750  enters a WLAN zone  7114 ,  7214 ); and in which K-Corporation would otherwise need an enormous marketing budget to win widespread acceptance of its map service. In some cases, for example, user  177  may have consented to such updates and to have her device  2750  participate in ongoing map updates (e.g. by installing or activating one or more apps  4482 ,  4483 ) by reporting indications in WLAN service availability (indicating a WLAN router  3103  apparently having gone offline, e.g.). In respective variants, moreover, device  2750  may be configured (by an agreement between the “second” and “third” parties, e.g.) to receive one or more such authorizations  4664 ,  4665  or coordinates  2021 ,  2022  or decisions  4544  as described above. Alternatively or additionally, the relative positional indication  4535  may (optionally) take the form of a local WLAN connectivity map segment  2337  presented via display  2875  and containing a blue dot representing mobile device  2750 . 
     In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for presenting relative positional information as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,064 (“Providing travel-logs based geo-locations relative to a graphical map”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,373,582 (“Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,339,394 (“Automatic method for photo texturing geolocated 3-D models from geolocated imagery”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,135,624 (“User profile and geolocation for efficient transactions”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,720,436 (“Displaying network objects in mobile devices based on geolocation”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,565,156 (“Method and technique for the processing and display of wideband geolocation determination data”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,336,181 (“Tagging and tracking system for assets and personnel of a commercial enterprise”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,467,951 (“Navigation system with alternative route determination mechanism and method of operation thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,397,168 (“Interfacing with a spatial virtual communication environment”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,121,781 (“System and method for reducing the amount of repetitive data sent by a server to a client for vehicle navigation”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,027,787 (“Vehicle navigation system and method”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,014,942 (“Remote destination programming for vehicle navigation”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,840,348 (“Output control method of voice guidance signal in navigation system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,742,774 (“Location-based text messaging”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,741,968 (“System and method for navigation tracking of individuals in a group”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,434,478 (“Service-rendering system, service-rendering apparatus and method, and navigation apparatus and method”). 
     With reference now to  FIG. 65 , shown is a high-level logic flow  6500  of an operational process. Operation  381  describes signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service (e.g. decision module  4061  implementing a decision  4541  whether or not to establish an interpersonal communication  1963  between user  1501  and user  177 , the decision  4541  being negative unless one or more account-specific criteria  4671 - 4673  defined by a cellular carrier are met). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the cellular carrier can provide an indication  4534  that a particular subscriber (user  1501 , e.g.) has given his authorization  4666  that such communications initiated at his device  2760  shall sponsor the participation of other devices  2750  when necessary; in which criterion  4671  is met only when such indication  4534  has been provided; in which criterion  4672  is met only when the “second” mobile device  2750  has WLAN service; in which user  177  and user  2701  are the same person; and in which tower  5885  comprises base transceiver station  320 . In some contexts, for example, the interpersonal communication  1963  can be maintained in lieu of such sponsorship (where device  2750  is operably coupled with network  1200  via access point  1820 , e.g.) but otherwise cannot be maintained (in a context in which the communication would be dropped without the assistance of tower  5885  owned by the cellular carrier, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, in some implementations, such communications cannot even be established without such authorization  4666 . 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for establishing or characterizing a communication channel as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,234,523 (“Automatic determination of success of using a computerized decision support system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,233,471 (“Wireless network system and method for providing same”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,145,975 (“Universal packet loss recovery system for delivery of real-time streaming multimedia content over packet-switched networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,054,856 (“Method for synchronizing voice traffic with minimum latency in a communications network”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,835,314 (“Physical layer interface system and method for a wireless communication system”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,787,896 (“Dispatch service architecture framework”). 
     Operation  385  describes signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service (e.g. decision module  5611  responding to a negative initial decision  4541  by implementing subsequent iterations of such decisions  4541 ,  4542  until one or more of the account-specific criteria  4671 - 4673  are met). This can occur, for example, in a context in which decision module  5611  is only invoked when an initial decision  4541  was negative (having resolved not to establish the interpersonal communication  1963  because none of the applicable account-specific criteria  4671 - 4673  were met, e.g.); in which decision module  5611  evaluates whether criterion  4621  is met (to obtain a positive or negative result  4611  after an earlier negative result  4601 , e.g.); in which decision module  5611  likewise evaluates whether criterion  4622  is met (to obtain a positive or negative result  4612  after an earlier negative result  4602 , e.g.); in which user  177  does not have a contractual relationship with any cellular carrier; in which such iterative operation effectively permits user  1501  to “park” on a communication linkage  5886  of device mobile device  2750  until an establishment of the communication; and in which user  1501  would otherwise have to forego the communication or keep repeating his communication request (waiting for user  177  to enter WLAN service space, e.g.) to avoid the cost component  122  associated with tower  5885  supporting user  177 . In some variants, for example, flow  6500  may include multiple instances of operation  385  being performed iteratively (until the communication is established or aborted, e.g.). 
     In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a monitoring operation as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,690 (“Business and social media system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,303 (“Method and system for automatic seamless mobility”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,423,768 (“Method for controlling the location information for authentication of a mobile station”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,270,346 (“Dynamic call anchoring”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,165,626 (“System and method of telephonic dialing simulation”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,140,060 (“Method and architecture to deliver pre-customized business card multimedia contents through IMS-based PLMNs for improving the existing calling line identification service”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,872,996 (“Mobile communication system and communication method thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,616,944 (“Method and apparatus for call notification and delivery to a busy mobile station”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,184,448 (“Adaptive modulation method, radio network controller, and mobile communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,016,675 (“System and method for controlling telephone service using a wireless personal information device”). 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for signaling an availability or other status as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,306,005 (“Dynamic communication and method of use”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,289,210 (“Location measurement acquisition adaptive optimization”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,271,626 (“Methods for displaying physical network topology and environmental status by location, organization, or responsible party”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,260,896 (“Monitoring business machines using a mesh network on field nodes”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,249,616 (“Satellite (GPS) assisted clock apparatus, circuits, systems and processes for cellular terminals on asynchronous networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,208,489 (“Method for reporting downstream packet resequencing status in cable modem”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,195,198 (“System, method and apparatus for protecting privacy when a mobile device is located in a defined privacy zone”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,108,501 (“Searching and route mapping based on a social network, location, and time”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,059,788 (“Telephone software testing system and method”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,059,011 (“Outage notification system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,037,126 (“Systems and methods of dynamically checking freshness of cached objects based on link status”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,010,230 (“Robotic ordering and delivery apparatuses, systems and methods”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,005,911 (“Systems for communicating current location information among mobile internet users and methods therefor”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,860,648 (“Map display system and method”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,392,017 (“Assessing wireless network quality”). 
     One or more of operations  6572 ,  6574 ,  6577 ,  6579  may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with operation  385 . Operation  6572  describes establishing a conference call among several devices as the communication, the several devices including the first mobile device and the second mobile device (e.g. configuration module  5622  implementing a telephone call  1951  among a group of several user devices that includes at least two mobile devices  2750 ,  2760 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the call  1951  is initiated by several users each calling a third device (a hub apparatus  100 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, the call  1951  may include one or more participants (including user  175  or user  1501  or user  2701 , e.g.) who are called by the “third” device (implementing service request handling module  144 , e.g.) in response to a request from another participant. 
     Operation  6574  describes establishing the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device responsive to receiving the charge authorization from a user of a third device (e.g. configuration module  5623  establishing one or more sessions  1952  or other interpersonal communications  1961 - 1963  via mobile devices  2750 ,  2760  responsive to receiving one or more authorizations  4665 - 4667  from a user  4101  of apparatus  100 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic  5610  resides in one or more switches  1996 ,  4110 ,  4120  or in network  1200 ; in which user  4101  is a subscriber or employee of a wireless carrier; and in which QQQ. In some contexts, for example, such authorization may apply to any such communications that mobile device  2760  initiates (pursuant to user  1501  subscribing to a map service provider or cellular provider, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such authorization may apply only to a single interpersonal communication that includes a subscriber&#39;s device  2760  (a call from a non-subscriber&#39;s device  2750  to the subscriber&#39;s device  2760 , e.g.). 
     Operation  6577  describes assigning a cost component of the communication to an account associated with a third mobile device conditionally, in response to receiving the charge authorization from the third mobile device before receiving any charge authorization from the first mobile device (e.g. response module  5631  causing a value  4553  of a non-subscriber&#39;s device  2750  participating in the communication to be deducted from an account  4556  associated with a device  7102  that belongs to a user  175  whose customer identifier is “429053-4101” rather than from another account  4555 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the communication (an interpersonal communication  1961 - 1963  described above, e.g.) includes a “first” mobile device  2760  and a “second” mobile device  2750  as well as the “third” mobile device  7102 ; in which user  175  and user  4101  are both subscribers of a wireless carrier who maintains subscriber status database  680 ; and in which response module  5631  would ordinarily have requested such authorizations  4665 - 4668  from respective users in response to the communication but in which such request was unnecessary this time because user  175  provided an authorization  4668  for such cost component assignments in advance (pre-authorized before anyone initiated the communication, e.g.). 
     In some variants a value  4553  of cost component  122  may be fifteen “minutes” even when the communication only lasted five minutes. This can occur, for example, either as a per-communication cost (fifteen “minutes” consumed per instance of a non-subscribing guest participation, e.g.) or as a premium usage rate (three account “minutes” consumed per minute of non-subscribing guest participation, e.g.). In either case, such a cost component  122  may result directly in a negative balance (exceeding the usage limit by charging 15 “minutes” to an account having a current balance of 13 “minutes,” e.g.) for this month for user  175  even if his own participation in the communication did not incur any cost (because it was not during peak hours or because he was in WLAN zone  7114  during the call, e.g.). This can occur, for example, where the account  4556  associated with the “third” mobile device  7102  indicates that an 800-minute monthly allocation with only 13 minutes left will be replenished in 23 days (see  FIG. 4D ). 
     Operation  6579  describes manifesting the communication by establishing a direct wireless linkage between a cell tower and the second mobile device partly based on receiving the charge authorization and partly based on the second mobile device not having WLAN service (e.g. decision module  5612  implementing a decision  4545  to establish one or more wireless linkages  5886  directly between mobile device  2750  and a cell tower  5885  partly based on receiving one or more such authorizations  4665 - 4667  and partly based on an indication  4536  of mobile device  2750  being in cell-only zone  7115 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which mobile device  2750  is the “second” mobile device; in which wireless linkage  5886  is “direct” by virtue of spanning a free space medium (air, e.g.) of several meters or more without active components (repeaters, e.g.) that extend the span by receiving and relaying wireless signals; in which such a linkage usually would not occur without such assistance from cell tower  5885 ; and in which such implementation occurs as a real-time response (within a few seconds, e.g.) to someone (a third party, e.g.) entering such authorization(s). Alternatively or additionally, decision module  5612  may perform operation  6579  by establishing the direct wireless linkage between cell tower  3085  and the “second” mobile device  1750  partly based on having received the authorization  4667  earlier and partly based on one or more users  178 ,  179  of mobile device  1750  requesting to establish the communication while in “free ride” zone  7815 . 
     With reference now to flow  6600  of  FIG. 66  and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations  6654 ,  6655 ,  6657 ,  6658  may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of operations  24 - 35  or  371 - 380  described above. 
     Operation  6654  describes causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the handheld device (e.g. response module  1735  routing some or all of wireless signal  1324  to a special-purpose video data processing module  2642  unless and until an indication  1343  is received that temperature sensor  608  exceeds a threshold). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a handheld device  2760  implements control logic  610  and other event-sequencing logic  1110 ,  1350 ; in which comparator  1162  is configured to determine whether a temperature-indicative signal  2051  therefrom exceeds threshold  2083  and to transmit a Boolean result  1413  of the comparison to response module  1735 ; in which threshold  2083  is calibrated so that the effective temperature threshold is 47° C.; and in which an extended use of processing module  2642  would otherwise make it uncomfortable for user  1501  to hold device  2760 . In some contexts, for example, device  2760  may implement one or more other devices  1000 ,  1750  described herein. Alternatively or additionally, an instance of application module  1043  may be implemented in a server  1396  remote from handheld device  2760  and configured to perform operation  6654  remotely (by controlling how much data  1303 ,  1304  to include in a wireless signal  1324  as a function of the state  618  of a temperature sensor  608  residing in handheld device  2760 , e.g.). By postponing or refraining from transmitting some of the data  1304 , for example, such an application module  1043  can effectively cause handheld device  2760  to cool down remotely (by deactivating or slowing operations in one or more processing modules  2641 ,  2642  aboard handheld device  2760 , e.g.) without wasting transmission bandwidth. In another variant, moreover, operation  6654  may be performed by a special-purpose response module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  671  having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of numerous transistors  351 ,  352  and voltage levels  311 - 314  in one or more integrated circuits  361 , e.g.) configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device  2760  as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state  618  of a temperature sensor  608  in the handheld device  2760 . 
     Operation  6655  describes causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a portable device as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the portable device (e.g. response module  1736  causing one or more segments  2432 - 2434  of a wireless signal  2430  to be handled by a special-purpose processing module  2644  in a portable detection unit  2610  as an automatic and conditional response to a sufficient charging state  2617  of a battery  2615 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which detection unit  2610  comprises a portable device  1750 ; in which at least some segments  2434  include coordinates  2021 ,  2022  in a virtual reality space (game data, e.g.); in which processing module  2644  comprises an FFT module  1823  or other such special-purpose components implemented in FPGA  1870 ; and in which real-time rendering in response to coordinates  2021 ,  2022  or other such processing-intensive functions would not otherwise be feasible in a production-grade portable device  1750 . In another variant, moreover, operation  6655  may be performed by a special-purpose response module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2682  having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module  425  in a portable secondary device  220  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1758  of network  1700 , e.g.) as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery  2615 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which special-purpose module  425  comprises an FFT module  592 , sorting module  595 , or detection module  599  formed directly on integrated circuit  440  (implementing ASIC  540 , e.g.). 
     Operation  6657  describes causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a control component of the wireless signal (e.g. interface module  1724  directing one or more data segments  2431 - 2433  of a wireless signal  2430  from device  1774  to be processed by a special-purpose decryption module  1131  within device  1750  as a conditional response to a control parameter  2431  in the wireless signal  2430  being “10”). This can occur, for example, in a context in which interface module  1724  would direct data segments  2432 ,  2433  to be decrypted conventionally (by a general purpose central processing unit  212  executing decryption code  2425  resident in internal cache  215 , e.g.) in response to control parameter  2431  being “00” or “01” or “11”; and in which the algorithm embodied in such decryption code  2425  would be more readily susceptible to reverse engineering (decompilation, e.g.) than special-purpose decryption module  1131 . In some contexts, for example, such a data segment  2432  may (optionally) include telephonic or other encrypted audio data blocks  2131 - 2133 . Alternatively or additionally, in some embodiments, an initiation module  174  in device  1774  may perform operation  6657  by configuring control parameter  2431  to have a value (“10” or “11,” e.g.) that causes interface module  1723  to route unencrypted data blocks  2121 - 2123  to a special-purpose digital-to-analog converter  1125 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which interface module  1723  would direct data segments  2432 ,  2433  to be converted conventionally (by DAC  1126 , e.g.) in response to control parameter  2431  being “00” or “01”. Alternatively or additionally, in some embodiments, a response module  1737  may be configured to perform an instance of operation  6657  by enabling one or more other response modules  1735 ,  1736  conditionally, based upon a control parameter  2431  in a received wireless signal  2430 . In another variant, moreover, operation  6657  may be performed by a special-purpose interface module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2471  having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a data segment  2434  of a wireless signal  2430  to be processed by a special-purpose module (FFT module  592  or sorting module  595  or other detection module  599 , e.g.) in one or more mobile devices  1000 ,  2760 ,  7802  as an automatic and conditional response to a control parameter  2431  (access code  2032 , e.g.) of the wireless signal  2430 . 
     Operation  6658  describes causing first content of a wireless signal to pass either through a first memory of a particular device or through a second memory of the particular device selected as an automatic and conditional response to whether or not second content of the wireless signal satisfies a first criterion (e.g. interface module  1722  routing data blocks in a wireless signal  1321  to pass through queue  570  if they comprise auditory data  2120  and otherwise generally to pass through queue  580 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which wireless signal  1321  also includes a Boolean indication  2102  of whether or not the data blocks comprise auditory data  2120 , in which queue  570  resides in cache  255  or other volatile memory  262 , in which queue  580  resides in phase change memory  231  or other non-volatile memory  242 ; and in which primary device  210  (instantiated in one or more devices  1752 ,  1754  of network  1700 , e.g.) would otherwise need either to provide an ongoing bias current to volatile memory  262  or to incur performance degradation (resulting from excessive interaction with non-volatile memory  242 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, interface module  1722  may be configured to route the data blocks in wireless signal  1321  to pass through queue  570  conditionally in response to a “positive” Boolean indication  2103  (signifying that they comprise encrypted data  2130 , e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation  6658  may be performed by a special-purpose interface module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2481  having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a data component  881  of a wireless signal  2430  to pass through a less-accessible non-volatile memory  243  of an integrated circuit (primary device  210 , e.g.) if a configuration component  882  of wireless signal  2430  satisfies a 1st criterion and otherwise to cause the data component  881  to pass through more-accessible memory  242  of the integrated circuit. 
     With reference now to flow  6700  of  FIG. 67  and to other flows described above, in some variants, several modes are presented. A first provides operation  6752  and operation  6755 . A second provides operation  6756  and operation  6757 . A third provides operation  6758  and operation  6759 . One or more of these modes may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above. 
     Operation  6752  describes causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of a particular device (e.g. response module  1731  triggering a dual-mode core  711  to draw from data queue  580 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic  710 ,  910  (instantiated ASIC  540  or in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1760  of network  1700 , e.g.) implements the first core operating mode as a “positive” Boolean value  743  (as a nominal voltage level less than one volt at electrical node  924 , e.g.); and in which dual-mode core  711  is operating in a low-voltage core operating mode  721  (manifesting Boolean value  743 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such triggering may invoke special-purpose circuitry  681  having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of transistors and voltage levels in one or more integrated circuits, e.g.) configured to cause a multimodal core  635  or other configurable core  733  to draw from data queue  580 . 
     Operation  6755  describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the particular device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the first data queue crossing a volume threshold (e.g. configuration module  2691  manifesting a decision whether or not to cause the dual-mode core  711  or other configurable core  733  to draw from data queue  580  in another core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication  1345  of a volume  706  of data queue  580  crossing volume threshold  2087 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the “other” core operating mode  722  is a higher-voltage mode (implementing a “negative” Boolean value  743  as a nominal voltage level  314  greater than one volt at electrical node  924 , e.g.) and in which maintaining effective processing throughput would otherwise require one or more additional cores  731 ,  732  drawing from data queue  580 . In some variants, moreover, operation  6755  may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  761  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision  2222  whether or not to cause an activation module  709  to select and activate a different core operating mode for one or more cores  733  partly based on Boolean value  743  and partly based on a charging sensor state  2617  of a detection unit  2610  operably coupled to event-sequencing logic  710 . 
     Operation  6756  describes causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of a particular device (e.g. response module  1732  directing a dual-mode core  712  to draw from data queue  580 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic  910  implements Boolean value  742  at electrical node  922  (as a voltage level, e.g.); in which ASIC  540  includes event-sequencing logic  710 ,  910  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1762  of network  1700 , e.g.); and in which one or more dual-mode cores  712  are operating in a higher-voltage core operating mode  722  (manifesting Boolean value  742 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such operation may comprise special-purpose circuitry  682  having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a multimodal core  635  or other configurable core  733  to draw from data queue  580 . 
     Operation  6757  describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the particular device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the particular device (e.g. configuration module  2692  signaling a decision  2224  whether or not to cause dual-mode core  712  to use a lower-voltage operating mode  721  in processing item  582  as a conditional response to temperature sensor  608  indicating a thermal state  618  hotter than a design threshold  2088 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which threshold  2088  is higher than 43° C.; in which temperature sensor  608  is calibrated to implement threshold  2088  by design (lacking any explicit access to thresholds  2081 - 2089 , e.g.); in which device  1750  includes detection unit  2610  and medium  2210 ; in which ASIC  540  includes control logic  610 ; and in which such effective processing throughput would otherwise make device  1750  uncomfortable for user  1501  to hold for more than a minute. Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, threshold  2088  may be lower than 47° C. In some variants, moreover, operation  6757  may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  672  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision  2224  whether or not to cause a multimodal core  635  or other configurable core  733  to change core operating modes as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state  618  of a temperature sensor  608 . 
     Operation  6758  describes causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of a particular device (e.g. response module  1733  triggering a multimodal core  635  to draw from data queue  580 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which ASIC  540  includes control logic  610  (instantiated in one or more devices  1760 ,  1770  of network  1700 , e.g.) and in which control logic  610  implements a mode designation decision  2223  of “A” (signifying an error-tolerant operating mode  630  that is faster than operating mode  631  and that runs cooler than operating mode  632 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, such triggering may invoke special-purpose circuitry  683  having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause one or more dual-mode cores  711 ,  712  or other cores  731 - 733  to draw from data queue  580 . 
     Operation  6759  describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the particular device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the particular device (e.g. configuration module  2693  acting upon a mode designation decision  2223  of “B” before or while processing item  583  from data queue  580  partly based on charging sensor  2607  indicating a sufficient charging state  2617  and partly based on another Boolean value  741 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which ASIC  540  is operatively coupled with detection logic  2610 ; in which a mode designation decision  2223  of “B” signifies a high-latency operating mode  631  (one that runs cooler than operating mode  632  and that results in a lower error rate than that of operating mode  630 , e.g.); and in which optimizing a high-throughput processing application across a family of devices (having similar architecture but different power source attributes, e.g.) would otherwise be impractical. In some contexts, for example, activation module  708  may (optionally) be configured to implement such decision  2223  by switching multimodal core  635  into its high-latency operating mode  631  immediately. Alternatively or additionally, Boolean value  741  may manifest one or more of a thermal state  618  of a temperature sensor  608  (as decision  2224 , e.g.) or an indication  1345  of a volume  706  of data queue  580  crossing volume threshold  2087 . In some variants, moreover, operation  6759  may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2681  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision  2225  whether or not to cause a dual-mode core  712  to draw from data queue  580  in a higher-voltage core operating mode  722  as an automatic and conditional response to charging sensor  2607  indicating a sufficient charging state  2617 . 
     With reference now to flow  6800  of  FIG. 68  and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations  6851 ,  6853 ,  6855 ,  6857 ,  6859  may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above. 
     Operation  6851  describes detecting a series of service region departure events (e.g. registration module  1974  detecting occurrences of device  2910  departing from zone  2980  at position  2908  and from zone  2970  at position  2909 , e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  1910  comprises or receives data from device  2910  and in which registration module  1974  could not otherwise detect an unsuitable service availability context (driving through a thicket of noncontiguous service gaps, e.g.) would not otherwise be cost effective to implement commercially. In some contexts, for example, device  2910  can report such departure events some time later (via telephone switch  1996  or when device  2910  comes into a WLAN communication range  2866  of WLAN router  2860 , e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation  6851  may be performed by a special-purpose aggregation module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2501  having an event-sequencing structure configured to detect status data  2320  that includes indications  2276 ,  2277  of two or more such departure events. See  FIG. 34 . 
     Operation  6853  describes incrementally decreasing a dataflow through a wireless communication channel (e.g. configuration module  2675  causing a somewhat smaller fraction  2011  of user data  2150  to pass via a wireless linkage  2767  as a conditional response to one or more Boolean values  741 - 745  described herein). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  2760  includes event-sequencing logic  1210  (instantiated in one or more devices  1780 ,  1782  of network  1700 , e.g.); in which user data  2150  comprises a series  2125  of data blocks  2121 ,  2122 ,  2123  most or all of which were obtained from user  1501  via a microphone  1217 ,  2817 ; in which at least a remainder of the user data  2150  comprises a signal  2758  passing through another channel  2780 ; in which channel  2770  is “wireless” by virtue of having at least one wireless linkage  2767 ; in which configuration module  2675  causes fraction  2011  to drop by at most about half during operation  6853 ; and in which such incremental decrease eases congestion in a vicinity of linkage  2767 . In some contexts, for example, operation  6853  may result from one or more indications of faster processing of signal  2758  (manifested by one or more Boolean values  742 ,  743  described herein, e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation  6853  may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module  2675  (in supervisor unit  1630 , e.g.) implemented as circuitry  2503  having an event-sequencing structure configured to decrease a data flow rate  2095  through linkage  4151  incrementally (by an incremental adjustment to a voice sampling rate  2096  applied to a signal  2059  from microphone  1217  during a telephone call  1951 , e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a degradation of service (dropped call, e.g.) resulting from excessive network resource loading would not otherwise motivate a voluntary incremental attrition of participants in interpersonal communications (video chats, e.g.). 
     Operation  6855  describes signaling a decision whether or not to transmit any user data via a first communication channel (e.g. configuration module  2676  transmitting a Boolean decision  2226  whether or not to transmit any user data  2150  via linkage  4161  as a conditional response to one or more Boolean values  741 - 745  described herein). This can occur, for example, in a context in which configuration module  2676  generates decision  2226  by combining Boolean values  741 ,  742  (with an AND gate or operation, e.g.). In some contexts, moreover, such decision  2226  may be overridden by one or more other Boolean values  743 ,  744  described herein being positive. In another variant, moreover, operation  6855  may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2505  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a Boolean decision  2226  whether or not to transmit any user data  2150  via queue  580 . 
     Operation  6857  describes signaling a decision whether or not to adjust a latency threshold for user data (e.g. a special-purpose processing module  2643  signaling a decision  2227  whether or not to adjust a latency threshold  2089  for user data  2150 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user data  2150  comprises sequential video or voice data segments  2431 - 2433  encoded at device  1768 ; in which segments  2431 ,  2433  arrive promptly at device  1750  via wireless linkage  1771  but in which segment  2432  is significantly delayed; in which a response module  1738  applies an effective latency threshold  2089  (and an arrival time of one or more other segments, e.g.) in deciding when to treat segment  2432  as lost and to play segment  2433  (via decoding module  1151  and via a speaker  442  or display  445 , e.g.); in which device  2760  event-sequencing logic  1110 ; and in which such playing of segment  2433  would otherwise occur too late (due to a large latency threshold  2089  that was previously necessary being maintained unnecessarily, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, decision  2227  may result in an effective latency being reduced from 0.3 seconds to 0.1 seconds in response to an indication  2078  of a significant bit error rate decrease or to an indication  2079  of a significant signal strength increase or to other such manifestations of improved channel performance received from one or more detection modules  1673 ,  1674  described herein. (Except as noted, such quantitative changes as described herein are “significant” if they exceed 20% of a baseline value.) In another variant, moreover, operation  6857  may be performed by a special-purpose processing module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2507  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a conditional decision  2227  whether or not to increase the effective latency threshold  2089  (to more than 1 second, e.g.) in response a user&#39;s activation of a speech recognition module  1123  (implemented in device  1768  or device  2760 , e.g.) so that words are recognized in data segments  2431 - 2433  there. In some contexts, such recognized words may then be processed by a translation module (an instance of interlingual translation application module  1044  or text-to-speech translation module  1124 , e.g.) before being played (via speaker  442  or display  445 , e.g.). 
     Operation  6859  describes comparing a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold (e.g. detection module  1673  comparing a data block delivery failure rate  2091  against a threshold  2081 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  2771  includes one or more antennas  4205 ,  1905  operably connected (via channel  2770 , e.g.) with network  1990  (including device  2750 , e.g.) and in which detection module  1673  would otherwise need to rely upon cruder channel metrics (signal strength or resource loading, e.g.) in deciding how to route user data  2150 . Alternatively or additionally, operation  6859  may be performed by a special-purpose detection module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2509  having an event-sequencing structure configured to compare a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold as described above with reference to flow  3200 . 
     With reference now to flow  6900  of  FIG. 69  and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations  6952 ,  6954 ,  6956 ,  6958  may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above. 
     Operation  6952  describes implementing a specific positional model to represent both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator (e.g. aggregation module  1172  generating or updating a geographic model  2301  that includes a record  2327  indicating an approximate position  2341  and radius  2345  relating to a range of router  3101  and also a record  2328  indicating more complex shape-descriptive information  2313  relating to a range of router  3103 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which record  2327  identifies a round region (approximating the zone  3121  served by router  3101  and having a radius  2345 , e.g.); in which record  2328  identifies an oblong region (approximating the zone  3123  served by router  3103 , e.g.); and in which model  2301  could not otherwise maintain an accurate geographical distribution of wireless service status in region  3155  effectively on an ongoing basis. In a context of one or more routers  3101 - 3103  reportedly failing to provide service (based upon a report from a device  3180  that failed to obtain service via router  3101  at position  2348 , e.g.), aggregation module  1172  may update model  2301  (from version  2363  indicating service in zone  2351 , e.g.) to a version  2362  showing loss of service at other positions  2349  also. Alternatively or additionally, in some contexts, operation  6952  may be performed by a special-purpose aggregation module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2502  having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of numerous transistors  351 ,  352  and voltage levels  311 - 314  in one or more integrated circuits  361 , e.g.) configured to implement a model  2201  comprising an image  2251  (shown via display  445 , e.g.) depicting a region  4165  (served by device  4160 , modeled as an isotropic radiator, e.g.) and another region  4155  (approximated as a semicircular map region  2255 , e.g.) served by device  4150  (represented as an anisotropic radiator, e.g.). 
     Operation  6954  describes signaling a result to a user via another device (e.g. transmission module  1183  transmitting one or more indications  1253 ,  1254 ,  1341 - 1345 ,  2071 - 2079  as described herein remotely to a device  2760  held by user  4101 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which an instance of event-sequencing logic  1110  (implemented in device  1776 , e.g.) comprises a transmission module  1183  that is remote from device  2760 . In some contexts, for example, the result can comprise one or more instances (1) of clips  2090  generated by an audio capture module  1121  or by a video capture module  1121 ; (2) of coordinates  2021 ,  2022  from GPS module  1122 ; (3) of textual expressions  1432  of a word from speech recognition module  1123 ; (4) of decrypted data blocks from decryption module  1132 ; (5) of decoded data blocks  2122  from decoding module  1152 ; (6) of maps  2330 , records  2327 - 2329 , or other manifestation of a model  2201 ,  2301  from aggregation module  1174 ; or (7) of other such results from special-purpose event-sequencing logic (depicted in  FIGS. 7-13 , e.g.) or flows (depicted in  FIGS. 32-36 , e.g.) described herein. In some contexts, moreover, operation  6954  may be performed by a special-purpose transmission module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2471  remote from user  4101  and having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit a wireless signal so as to cause a manifestation of such result(s) as voltage levels (at electrical nodes  921 - 928 , e.g.) via an instance of event-sequencing logic  2410  (and via a speaker  442  or display  445 , e.g.) that is local to user  4101 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which integrated circuit  440  includes event-sequencing logic  2410 . 
     Operation  6956  describes transmitting user data via an ad hoc network (e.g. interface module  1725  or notification module  1745  routing at least some user data  2150  via one or more wireless linkages of an ad hoc network  1790 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which transmission module  1184  comprises software (resident in phase-change memory  4231  or removable memory  4232 , e.g.) executable by CPU  4212  and in which one or more devices  4210 ,  1750 ,  2760  send or receive such user data  2150  (comprising one or more interpersonal communications  1961 - 1963 , e.g.) as described herein via wireless linkage  1771 . Alternatively or additionally, operation  6956  may be performed by a special-purpose transmission module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2506  having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit status data  2320  or other signals  2051 - 2059  relating to user-owned devices, e.g.) via network  1790 . 
     Operation  6958  describes displaying via a mobile device at least some of a map that depicts a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective intercommunication (e.g. notification module  1741  causing a map  2330  that depicts a geographic cost transition relating to an interpersonal communication  1961  with a user  2701  of a remote device  2750  to be displayed before the communication begins). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user  4101  views a display  445  that depicts one or more versions  2361 ,  2362 ,  2363  of a segment of map  2330  (successively, e.g.); in which map  2330  represents one or more such cost-indicative service boundaries as a low-cost-service region (a zone  2353  shown in green, e.g.) bordering a higher-cost-service region or free-service region (a zone  2356  shown in white, e.g.); in which such costs will be incurred by user  4101  if the interpersonal communication  1961  takes place; and in which such costs would otherwise (without notification module  1741 , e.g.) be incurred without adequate warning. In some contexts, for example, one or more such versions  2361  depict a cost transition relating to costs that will be incurred by the user  2701  of the remote device  2750  (a zone  2351  shown in orange bordered by another cost-indicative service boundary, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such zone  2351  depicted in orange may become available (in a newer version  2363  of segment  2337 , e.g.) as a response to user  2701  placing a call to device  2760  (while device  2760  is ringing, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such zone  2351  depicted in orange may become available (to user  4101 , activated by saying “local roaming map” or by pushing a button, e.g.) as a response to user  4101  entering user data  2150  (via a keypad of device  2760 , e.g.) that identifies device  2750  (phone number  2285 , e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation  6958  may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  2508  having an event-sequencing structure configured to maintain a regional map  2330  (on server  1396 , e.g.) that features one or more cost-indicative service boundaries  2961 ,  2971  relating to prospective intercommunications via device  2910 . One or more versions of regional map  2330  may be updated, in some variants, in response to a positional or other status indication (signifying coordinates  2021 ,  2022  or operability status, e.g.) relating one or more service facilitation devices. In some contexts, for example, such devices (instantiated in one or more devices  1772 ,  1782  of network  1700 , e.g.) may include a tower  3085  or vehicle  1510  or mounted device  1530 . 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  6300 , operation  382  may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose input module  5174  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  4921  having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of event-sequencing logic  4910  in device  1000 , e.g.) configured to obtain an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device. This can occur, for example, in a context in which a non-subscribing user  177  tries to reach a subscriber&#39;s device  1000  via network  5590  by dialing providing an identifier  2286 ; in which network  5590  includes base transceiver stations  310 ,  330 ; in which device  1000  is the “first” mobile device. See  FIGS. 2 and 55 . Alternatively or additionally, decision module  4061  may include an electrical or other node set  4931  upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages  4634  or other levels  4693  each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor  4672  or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the indication (phone number  2285  or other value  4551 , e.g.). See  FIGS. 46 and 49 . 
     Also in such variants, operation  384  may be performed by a special-purpose response module  5634  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  4922  having an event-sequencing structure configured to respond to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the account associated with device  1000  is charged according to what fraction (how many minutes of, e.g.) the communication service occurred with device  7815  in “free ride” zone  7815 . Alternatively or additionally, response module  5634  may include an electrical or other node set  4932  upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages  4634  or other levels  4693  each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor  4672  or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests a utility value  4552  (expressed in minutes or cents, e.g.) of the communication service cost component. 
     If event-sequencing logic  4910  is implemented in an integrated circuit  361 , having many thousands or millions of transistors  351 ,  352  makes it feasible for a node set  4931  actually to implement special-purpose circuitry  4921  by virtue of bearing code (by manifesting input module  5174  as a voltage configuration, e.g.) usable via one or more processors  5605  or otherwise invocable (as an FPGA implementation, e.g.). Likewise node set  4932  may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry  4922  (by manifesting response module  5634  as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s). 
     In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for configuring a field programmable gate array (FPGA) as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,341,469 (“Configuration device for configuring FPGA”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,327,117 (“Reconfigurable FADEC with flash based FPGA control channel and ASIC sensor signal processor for aircraft engine control”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,294,396 (“Compact FPGA-based digital motor controller”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,225,081 (“Updating programmable logic devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,205,066 (“Dynamically configured coprocessor for different extended instruction set personality specific to application program with shared memory storing instructions invisibly dispatched from host processor”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,205,037 (“Data storage device capable of recognizing and controlling multiple types of memory chips operating at different voltages”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,190,699 (“System and method of multi-path data communications”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,166,237 (“Configurable allocation of thread queue resources in an FPGA”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,095,508 (“Intelligent data storage and processing using FPGA devices”); and U.S. Pat. No. 8,069,275 (“Network-based system for configuring a programmable hardware element in a measurement system using hardware configuration programs generated based on a user specification”). 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  6400 , operation  383  may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose configuration module  5621  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  4891  having an event-sequencing structure (e.g. one or more integrated circuits  363  including an instance of event-sequencing logic  4810 ,  5610 ) configured to obtain a third-party authorization for a device  1750  to present geographical WLAN connectivity data. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  1750  is a communication device that has been rooted (by user  177  or by the third party, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, configuration module  5621  may include an electrical or other node set  4881  upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages  4634  or other levels  4693  each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor  4672  or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the third party authorization  4665 . 
     Also in such variants, operation  386  may be performed by a special-purpose input module  5173  implemented as transistor-based circuitry  4892  configured to obtain a first position estimate of device  1750  or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry  3861  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain one or more position estimates  4442 - 4444  approximating a position of device  1750 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which the estimate(s) trigger a selective retrieval or update of a local WLAN connectivity map segment  2337 . Alternatively or additionally, input module  5173  may include an electrical or other node set  4882  upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages  4634  or other levels  4693  each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor  4672  or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the position estimate(s). 
     Also in such variants, operation  387  may be performed by a special-purpose decision module  4064  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  4893  having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit or otherwise signal a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. This can occur, for example, in a context in which such rooting (as contrasted with firmware configuration or other aspects of original equipment manufacture, e.g.) causes such authorization to operate as described herein (by enabling aftermarket apps blocked by the manufacturer of device  1750 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, decision module  4064  may include an electrical or other node set  4883  upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages  4634  or other levels  4693  each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor  4672  or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the decision whether or not to present the positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device. 
     If event-sequencing logic  4810  is implemented in an integrated circuit  361 , having many thousands or millions of transistors  351 ,  352  or more makes it feasible for a node set  4881  actually to implement special-purpose circuitry  4891  by virtue of bearing code (by manifesting configuration module  5621  as a voltage configuration, e.g.) usable via one or more processors  5605 . Likewise node set  4882  may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry  4922  (by manifesting input module  5173  or estimation module  5162  as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s). Likewise node set  4883  may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry  4893  (by manifesting decision module  4064  as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s) or otherwise invocable (as an FPGA implementation, e.g.). 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  6500 , operation  381  may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose decision module  4061  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  5061  having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of hardware-implemented event-sequencing logic  4010 ,  5010  on dielectric substrate  307 , e.g.) configured to signal a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. This can occur, for example, in a context in which primary unit  5110  implements the “first” mobile device; in which secondary unit  5120  implements the “second” mobile device; and in which circuit board  360  is operably coupled (via a wireless linkage, e.g.) with both. Alternatively or additionally, decision module  4061  may include an electrical or other node set  5051  upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages  4634  or other levels  4693  each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor  4672  or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the first decision  4541  whether or not to establish the communication. 
     Also in such variants, operation  385  may be performed by a special-purpose decision module  5611  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  5062  having an event-sequencing structure configured to respond to the first decision being negative by signaling another decision whether or not to establish the communication partly based on a new determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a new determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. This can occur, for example, in a context in which decision module  5611  performs operation  385  by invoking one or more configuration modules  5621 - 5624  or response modules  5631 - 5634 . In some contexts, for example, operation  385  may include one or more instances of operation  6572 , operation  6574 , operation  6577 , or operation  6579  as shown. Alternatively or additionally, decision module  5611  may include an electrical or other node set  5052  upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages  4634  or other levels  4693  each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor  4672  or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the second decision  4542  or subsequent decision  4543  whether or not to establish the communication. 
     If event-sequencing logic  5010  is implemented in an integrated circuit  361 , having millions of transistors  351 ,  352  or more makes it feasible for a node set  5051  actually to implement special-purpose circuitry  5061  by virtue of bearing code (by manifesting decision module  4061  as a voltage configuration, e.g.) usable via one or more processors  5605 . Likewise node set  5052  may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry  5062  (by manifesting decision module  5611  as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s) or otherwise invocable (as an FPGA implementation, e.g.). 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  5900 , operation  371  may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose input module  5171  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  3931  having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of event-sequencing logic  3910  in device  1750 , e.g.) configured to obtain a preference indication (a “first” or “second” option selected by a user  4101  of device  1750 , e.g.) within or from a mobile device  1750 . Also in such variants, operation  374  may be performed by a special-purpose transmission module  5122  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  3932  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision whether or not to trigger a transmission of a broadcast  4361  from or about mobile device  1750  as a conditional response to preference indication  4351  identifying the “first” option. This can occur, for example, in a context in which broadcast  4361  states that no subscriber device has yet accepted a charge for a multiparty communication (conference call, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more informational components  4365  of broadcast  4361  (comprising “awaiting authorization” or some other indication  4351  of the “first” option having been selected at device  1750 , e.g.) may have been received at a device  1760  that configures the broadcast  4361  for transmission. Also in such variants, operation  376  may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module  4082  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  3933  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision  4345  to trigger the multiparty communication as a conditional response to user  4101  having designated the “second” option. This can occur, for example, in a context in which operation  378  is performed by a special-purpose assignment module  3712  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  3934  having an event-sequencing structure configured to assign a communication cost component  121  to an account associated with the “first” mobile device  1750  as a conditional response to the same decision  4345 . Alternatively or additionally, respective instances of event-sequencing logic  3910  may reside in each of several devices  1750 ,  1752 ,  1756 ,  1758 ,  1760 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  1754  is the “second” mobile device. 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  6000 , operation  373  may be performed by a special-purpose tagging module  5152  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  3751  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain a message  4370  (call request, e.g.) that includes an identification  4373  of device  1000  with an indication  4354  (Boolean value, e.g.) that device  1000  (the “first” mobile device, e.g.) has been unlocked (and has no wireless carrier subscription available, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation  377  may be performed by a special-purpose validation module  5111  implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  3752  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain an indication  4355  of the account  4335  (an identifier of the account  4336  or valid authorization code, e.g.) associated with device  7102  (as the “second” mobile device, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which network  1200  is linked with network  1390 ; in which an instance of event-sequencing logic  3710  resides in server  1396 ; in which either the first or second mobile device requests server  1396  to facilitate a communication (phone call, e.g.) between them; and in which an instance of medium  4310  resides in event-sequencing logic  3710 . Alternatively or additionally, the “second” mobile device may not be a communication device but may be some other kind of device (a motor vehicle  1510  or wearable article described herein, e.g.) with some incidental communication capability (being associated with one or more active accounts  4336  or otherwise able to communicate via a wireless linkage, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation  379  may be performed by a special-purpose decision module  4063  implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry  3753  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the “second” mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to WLAN service and partly based on a communication between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  6100 , operation  372  may be performed by a special-purpose input module  5173  implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry  3861  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain one or more position estimates  4442 - 4444  approximating a past or present position of device  1750  (a communication device  2750  or other device capable of such communication, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which input module  5173  merely adopts a position estimate that it receives from another device, even if that estimate is actually that of the other device. (It should be noted that the phrase “communication device” is never used herein to refer to passenger vehicles or other such devices that may communicate merely as a tertiary function.) Also in such variants, operation  375  may be performed by a special-purpose validation module  5114  implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry  3862  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain provenance data  4451 - 4455  indicating a protocol  4384  by which device  1750  apparently obtained the estimate(s). This can occur, for example, in a context in which such provenance data comprises a textual label  4431  or similar digital expression that directly identifies the protocol; in which such data is deemed by technician  5401  to be sufficiently credible and relevant to warrant the use or non-use of the estimate(s) in updating one or more informational models  2301 ,  2302 ; and in which such models would not otherwise have any mechanism by which to be updated with automatically curated input. In some contexts, for example, such provenance data  4451  may indicate whether or not position estimate  4441  was obtained by a satellite GPS protocol. Alternatively or additionally, provenance data  4452  may indicate how many sensor-containing devices (satellites  1293  or towers  3085 , e.g.) were used in generating position estimate  4441  (values less than a threshold integer, such as 3 or 4 or 5, being contraindicative of suitability for use in updating map  2330 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, provenance data  4453  may comprise an explicit indication whether a particular undesirable protocol (cell identification or dead reckoning, e.g.) was used in generating position estimate  4441 . Alternatively or additionally, provenance data  4454  may comprise one or more apparently insignificant digits appended to the significant digits of position estimate  4441 . For example in a context in which GPS coordinates are expressed as &lt;34°00.000′N&gt; and &lt;135°00.000′E&gt; (as position estimate  4442 , e.g.) it may be inferred that two occurrences of “00.000” in these coordinates show artificial or coarse positioning at best, contraindicative of suitability. Alternatively or additionally, provenance data  4454  may indicate a model number  4411 , brand name  4412 , serial number, or other device identifier  4415  of a “second” device (in a context in which brand “S” or model “G” or device “2852-698214369T” have been identified by a technician  5401  as suitable or unsuitable, e.g.) that participated in the estimation. Alternatively or additionally, provenance data  4455  may indicate a supplementary location system (a differential global positioning service or wide area augmentation system to supplement GPS, e.g.) designated as a positive indication of sufficiency. Also in such variants, operation  380  may be performed by a special-purpose decision module  4062  implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry  3861  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision  4347  of whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map  2330  automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In some variants, moreover, such decision may be conditionally overridden (by a confirmation query protocol or similar criterion  4471  determining whether or not technician  5401  wants automatic curation implemented as changes in WLAN service availability to proceed, without manual verification, e.g.) or enabled (by an installation of app  4483  onto device  2750  satisfying a criterion  4472  for establishing that user  177  wants device  2750  to participate in ongoing map updates by reporting indications in WLAN service availability, e.g.). 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  3200 , operation  28  may be performed by one or more special-purpose initiation modules implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  1031  having an event-sequencing structure configured to establish a first wireless communication channel via linkage  1771  (e.g. including intermediate devices  1770 ,  1772 ) and from device  1750  and a second wireless communication channel from device  1750  and via device  1776 . This can occur, for example in a context in which such channels both extend to a remote device  1782 . Also in such variants, operation  32  may be performed by a special-purpose allocation module implemented as circuitry  1141  having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  921  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to implement an adjusted target percentage  2293  of user data  2150  being transmitted via linkage  1771  responsive to data block delivery failures of the second wireless communication channel becoming to frequent. 
     With reference now to flow  7000  of  FIG. 70  and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations  7052 ,  7053 ,  7056 ,  7059  may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above. 
     Operation  7052  describes handing off an interpersonal communication from a cellular base station to a WLAN access point (e.g. configuration module  4084  routing one or more calls  1951  or other interpersonal communications  1961 - 1963  via a WLAN access point  1840  when feasible). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  7802  participated in an earlier portion of the communication(s) via base transceiver station  330  (an initiation of which was made possible by cost allocation protocols described herein motivating a wireless carrier to provide service to a nonsubscriber, e.g.); in which a subscriber&#39;s device initiated such communication(s) to device  7802  before device  7802  crossed zone boundary  7850 , for which initiation the subscriber pays (as a premium service or as a standard monthly subscription feature, e.g.); and in which the latter portion of the communication(s)—after crossing zone boundary  7850 —would otherwise have resulted in cellular network service being unduly burdened. In some contexts, for example, operation  7052  causes a contingent cost component  122  posted to a subscriber account (for providing cellular service to a nonsubscriber, e.g.) at a minimum. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the earlier portion of the communication(s)—before device  7802  crossed zone boundary  7850 —resulted in the subscriber incurring a premium or other contingent cost component  122  as described herein (providing a “free ride” to user  178  at the expense of user  175 , e.g.) for communicating with a nonsubscriber. Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic  4010  may be implemented in a node  5300  having a wireless linkage  5364  to a “first” or “second” device  1000 . 
     Operation  7053  describes authorizing a cost component to be posted to a user account conditionally, at least partly based on a portion of a wireless communication using WLAN access (e.g. validation module  5113  providing an authorization  4395  for cost components  121 ,  122  to be posted to one or more subscriber accounts  4335 ,  4336  conditionally, at least partly based on some of a wireless interpersonal communication  1962  being routed through a base transceiver station  330  rather than through switch  4120 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the interpersonal communication  1962  comprises a call  1951  that began with device  7802  in “free ride” zone  7815  and ended with device  7802  in WLAN zone  7214 ; in which a handoff occurred pursuant to operation  7052 ; in which a latter portion of the interpersonal communication  1962  did not incur a charge to any participant thereof (because the one or more other participants were in WLAN zone  7114 , e.g.); in which an earlier portion of the interpersonal communication  1962  incurred a charge to a subscribing user  175  who participated; and in which BTS  330  would not otherwise have supported that communication (without an authorization  4395  from validation module  5113 , e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, another instance of such authorization  4395  may trigger BTS  330  to accept a handover (via operation  7056 , e.g.) in response to device  7802  crossing from “free ride” zone  7815  into WLAN zone  7214 . 
     Operation  7056  describes handing off an interpersonal communication from a WLAN access point to a cellular base station (e.g. configuration module  4083  routing one or more teleconferences or other interpersonal communications  1961 - 1963  from a configuration in which one or more devices  7801 ,  7821  communicate with network  1200  via WLAN access point  1840  to a configuration in which such communication is routed via cellular base transceiver station  330 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user  178  walks toward or across zone boundary  7850  (into “free ride” zone  7815 , e.g.) during the interpersonal communication; in which configuration module  4083  has an accurate current model  2302  estimating a current position of zone boundary  7850  accurately; and in which configuration module  4083  responds to a succession of position estimates  4441 - 4444  indicative of such movement (predictive of a crossing, e.g.) by initiating such a handoff. Alternatively or additionally, configuration module  4083  may trigger such a handoff responsive to an indication that user  179  is driving toward “free ride” zone  7815  (approaching zone boundary  7850 , e.g.). 
     Operation  7059  describes causing a particular device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map that includes automatically curated map data (e.g. map update module  5415  causing one or more devices  1000 ,  1750  to indicate a segment  2337  of map  2330  after updating model  2302  as an automatic response to having received one or more position estimates  4441 - 4444  with corresponding service status data  4433  from mobile device  2750 ,  2760  and with provenance data  4451 - 4455  indicating an adequate suitability). This can occur, for example, in a context in which model  2302  comprises an instance of map  2330  resident in network  5490 ; in which access map server  2300  implements control unit  5410 , in which technician  5401  has defined one or more device-implemented adequacy criteria  4471 - 4473  (relating to precision or accuracy or relevance, e.g.); and in which map  2330  thereby includes wireless connectivity map data that is automatically curated. 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  3300 , operation  24  may be performed by a special-purpose registration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  1481  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain at primary device  2760  an internet protocol address or other identifier of device  2760 . Also in such variants, operation  30  may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as circuitry  1221  having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  925  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to cause a primary device  2760  to indicate whether or not device  2760  is within zone  2960 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which the “third” device comprises a vehicle or mounted device  1530  providing wireless service  1335 ; in which the WLAN communication range comprises region  4165  or zone  2960 ; in which primary device  2760  is not currently engaged in a bidirectional interpersonal communication via device  2760 ; and in which primary device  2760  includes a light-emitting diode or other suitable display  445  configured to display the Boolean indication. Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, the third device may comprise a moving vehicle  1510  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1776  of network  1700 , e.g.) or parked vehicle (comprising device  4160 , e.g.) providing Wi-Fi service. 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  3400 , operation  27  may be performed by a special-purpose detection module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  1483  having an event-sequencing structure configured to detect an availability to participate in one or more modes of telephonic dialog  1953  as a conditionally response to an indirect Boolean indication  2274  whether or not a device  2910  (instantiated in one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  1780  of network  1700 , e.g.) crossed boundaries too rapidly (as a determination of whether an average or other interval  1423  between events exceeded a threshold, said determination being an inverse of Boolean indication  2274 , e.g.) within time interval  1421 . Also in such variants, operation  33  may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as circuitry  1482  having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  926  at decision-indicative voltage levels operably coupled to detection the module, e.g.) configured to signal the availability to participate in telephonic dialog  1953  in response to a successful communication via router  3101 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  2910  is at position  2349  and in which router  3101  is online (providing wireless service  1331  in zone  2351 , e.g.). 
     In some variants, one or more wireless communication parameters may be adopted by a “first” or “second” mobile device (implementing one or more devices  1000 ,  1750 ,  7102 ,  7802  described above or as a wearable assembly  3810 , e.g.) based at least partially on a physical state of the mobile device to strengthen, enhance, or improve a communication channel between the mobile device and another wireless device, such as a base transceiver station. Additionally or alternatively, a physical state of (such as a location of or an orientation of) the mobile device may be altered to strengthen, enhance, or improve a communication channel between the mobile device and another device, such as a base transceiver station  330  (such as orientation of at least one communicating device may be altered to strengthen, enhance, or improve a communication channel between/among one or more wireless devices). However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, a physical state of the mobile device may include a spatial location of the mobile device or an orientation of the mobile device. For certain example implementations, a spatial location (such as which may be merged with or incorporated into or linked to 3D mapping data, including those of buildings) may be represented with a geographical position of the mobile device (such as with regard to a point on the earth) or an elevation of the mobile device (such as with regard to a height above the earth). For certain example implementations, an orientation may be represented with Euler angles/rotations or pitch/roll/yaw in 3D Euclidean space. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, one or more wireless communication parameters, such as one or more antenna assembly configuration parameters, may include, but are not limited to the following. First, an antenna element set may be selected from among multiple antenna elements of an antenna array. Second, a particular phase or delay may be applied to each antenna element of a selected set of antenna elements. Third, a particular power may be applied to each antenna element of a selected set of antenna elements. Fourth, a phased array antenna (such as which may be formed from multiple antenna elements comprising or including a single dipole) may include multiple antenna elements that are driven with particular signal values. For instance, different elements (such as if an element is covered/blocked), phases/delays, or power (or a combination thereof, etc.) may be applied to input/output connections of a phased array antenna (such as to establish or form a beam). Antennas, including but not limited to, antenna arrays or phased arrays, may comprise or be formed/constructed using meta-materials. Fifth, a frequency of wireless signal(s) coupled to/from an antenna may be adjusted. Sixth, a frequency band and/or wireless communication standard employed may be altered, including but not limited to using a different antenna. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some embodiments, messages  4370  and other signals  1321 - 1324 ,  2051 - 2059 ,  2430 ,  2757 ,  2758 ,  4430  described may be transmitted (via wireless “linkages” described herein, e.g.), received, propagated, generated, or processed (or a combination thereof, etc.) in accordance with any one or more of a number of different wireless communication standards, channel access methods, frequencies, modulations, etc. Examples of wireless communication standards may include, but are not limited to, IEEE 802.11 Standards (such as 802.11-1997, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11-2007, 802.11n, 802.11-2012, 802.11ac, 802.11ad, or a combination thereof, e.g.), WiMAX, AMPS, GSM (such as GPRS), EDGE, UMTS/UTRA (such as UTRA with a type of CDMA or HSPA, e.g.), 3GPP (such as Evolved HSPA or Long Term Evolution, e.g.), LTE Advanced, Bluetooth®, Near Field Communication (NFC), or some combination thereof. Examples of channel access methods may include, but are not limited to, DSSS, FDMA, OFDMA, TDMA, STDMA, SSMA, CDMA, SDMA, some combination thereof, or so forth. Examples of nominal frequencies may include, but are not limited to, 13-14 MHz, 400 MHz, 800-900 MHz, 1700/1800/1900 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2500 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 60 GHz, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, one or more of the following options may be applied to determine a suitable combination of wireless communication parameters. Options may include, but are not limited to, (a) sets of antenna elements (such as different sets of 4 selected antenna elements from 16 total available antenna elements), (b) different directionalities of beams (such as such as particular cardinal directions or up—opposite gravitational forces), (c) different beam shapes (such as lengths, widths, perimeters, or a combination thereof, etc.), (d) different signal phases at respective antenna elements, (e) different signal delays at respective antenna elements, (f) different power levels, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Additionally or alternatively, with regard to power, a wireless node may use relatively higher power for communication (such as transmitting signals) while using relatively lower power for investigation of appropriate wireless communication parameters (such as sniffing signals). However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, the mobile device may employ a group of wireless communication parameters that have been determined via experimentation. Additionally or alternatively, the mobile device may store a group of (such as one or more suitable combinations) of wireless communication parameters for a given physical state of the mobile device in an antenna configuration data structure  4330  (implemented in FPGA  870 , e.g.) or send a group of wireless communication parameters for a given physical state of the mobile device to a network-side orchestrator of a data structure. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, the mobile device may schedule or initiate at least one experimentation round based at least partially on any of the following: (a) in the background while other automations progress, (b) at timed intervals or if a certain amount of time elapses, (c) if signal quality drops below a certain level, (d) if a certain amount of movement (such as translational, rotational, or a combination thereof, etc.) is detected (such as using an inertial measurement unit (IMU) or GPS unit), (e) at a known or determinable boundary for a physical state entry of an antenna configuration data structure  4330  (such as which may include a parameter-to-physical state data structure), (f) if the mobile device is approaching a known or determinable boundary for a physical state entry of an antenna configuration data structure  4330 , (g) predicatively (such as based at least partly on (i) predicting a certain amount of movement is soon to occur, (ii) predicting that a boundary crossing into a physical state that corresponds to a different physical state entry of an antenna configuration data structure  4330 , or a combination thereof, etc.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, experimentation may be constrained responsive to one or more conditional parameters. By way of example only, parameter options/possibilities to be tested may be constrained based at least partially on power usage. For instance, the mobile device may intend to enable wireless communication with at least one bases station, but limit power output for such wireless communication to a particular power level (such as 100 mW). A battery may set limits or establish specified guidelines that constrain power usage, including but not limited to constraining power usage/charge drain over time. Accordingly, an experimentation module may trade (i) a selection of wireless standard being used or (ii) frequency or bandwidth of searching, for example, (instead of or in addition to transmit power) with power drain. Moreover, as another example, a power constraint may be selectively applied based at least partly on time of day or predicted time until a battery will next be charged. For instance, whether or to what stringency a power constraint is applied may depend on a time of day. Accordingly, there may be a greater concern on battery drain earlier in a day as compared to later when recharging typically occurs (a typical temporal pattern of charging—such as around noon in a car as well as starting at around midnight with a wall outlet—may also or alternatively be considered). From an alternative perspective, a battery level may be considered as a condition for ascertaining at least one associated antenna assembly configuration parameter (such as if selecting a wireless communication mode—or a group of wireless communication parameters). However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, an antenna configuration data structure may have separate entries for, or otherwise denote a difference between, uplink versus downlink. Appropriate uplink and downlink communication parameters may differ because multipath may affect the mobile device more than a base transceiver station, because different frequencies may be assigned to uplink versus downlink communications, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, with respect to receiving commands or data at the mobile device from a base transceiver station, the mobile device may cooperate with the base transceiver station to obtain one or more wireless communication parameters. First, the base transceiver station may send to the mobile device or the mobile device may receive from the base transceiver station one or more wireless communication parameters that the mobile device may adopt. Second, the base transceiver station may send to the mobile device or the mobile device may receive from the base transceiver station at least some reception data from a perspective of the base transceiver station for the mobile device to incorporate into an automation process ascertaining what wireless communication parameters are to be implemented. Third, the mobile device and the base transceiver station may negotiate to determine a direction of a wireless signal that enables a reflection of a wireless signal off of an object between the mobile device and the base transceiver station (such as a bank shot may be planned and implemented) to facilitate signal propagation between the mobile device and the base transceiver station. Conducting a signal bank shot may be facilitated by using, for example, a 3D map depicting walls, furniture, terrain, vehicles, people, etc., and one or more reflection coefficients for proximate objects that indicate how or to what extent signals of particular frequencies can be expected to reflect off of an object. Cooperation between two wireless nodes may encompass, for example, any one or more of the above. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, a data structure may link one or more wireless communication parameters with a given physical state of the mobile device. Thus, if the mobile device knows its spatial location (such as in terms of GPS coordinates or placement within a 3D map of a building), a group of wireless communication parameters (such as a set of antenna elements and respective phase delays) to be adopted to communicate with a particular base transceiver station may be ascertained from data structure. For certain example implementations, an orientation of the mobile device may be part of an input physical state to ascertain associated wireless communication parameters (such as if an orientation is expected to be user-determined autonomously). Alternatively, an orientation of the mobile device may be part of a group of wireless communication parameters that are output based on an e.g. spatial location of the mobile device (such as if the mobile device is expected to indicate to a user a particular mobile-device-orientation offering enhanced communication—which may be especially pertinent, for instance, if the mobile device is not being held during use, such as when a user has a wired or wireless headset, or if a user is sitting in a chair that swivels). 
     In some variants, an antenna configuration data structure may include one or more entries having a physical state field that is associated with or linked to a field having a group of wireless communication parameters. However, a data structure may additionally or alternatively include one or more of the following conditions or potential inputs: (a) prediction of an upcoming physical state, (b) a power availability at a transmitter or a receiver (or a power usage constraint), (c) a spatial location (or orientation) of the base transceiver station, (d) an availability of one or more personal auxiliary relay items, (e) a time of day, (f) other, potentially-interfering wireless traffic that is known of through self-detection or notification, (g) an expected radio activity (such as is a data intensive activity, such as media streaming, anticipated?), (h) a device type for the mobile device, (i) one or more antenna characteristics of the mobile device (such as a feasible beam pattern, a polarization sensitivity, a frequency response, an impedance, or a combination thereof, etc.), (j) a frequency band, (k) a signal encoding, (l) one or more environmental factors (such as humidity—certain frequencies propagate less well than others in higher humidity (such as 50 GHz signals attenuate in the presence of water), temperature, physical barriers—stationary or moving, approaching devices, or a combination thereof, etc.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, a wireless node may develop an antenna configuration data structure. By way of example only, a wireless node may store or record a physical state along with a corresponding signal quality in association with each other in a data structure. A physical state may correspond to a currently-existing physical state, a recently-tested physical state, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, an updated association may be stored if there are certain amounts of change to (i) a physical state or (ii) signal quality or if a certain amount of (iii) time has elapsed, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Additionally or alternatively, for certain example implementations, a wireless node may replace or add to an existing entry if a new group of wireless communication parameters are discovered for a given physical state that provides superior signal quality. For certain example implementations, an entry of an antenna configuration data structure may include a time stamp representing when a value was determining, the mobile device or device type identifier of the mobile device that determined or was a source of a value, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, new values for entries may be determined via interpolation or extrapolation from values associated with other physical states. For example, if data is available (such as from experimentation in transmit or receive postures) with respect to multiple tested orientations, it may be predicted how well antenna elements (or other wireless communication parameters) will work at other orientations. Additionally or alternatively, if data is available with respect to multiple tested spatial locations (including if a 3D map of a room is accessible or if know directional capabilities of an antenna), it may be predicted how well antenna elements (or other wireless communication parameters) will perform at other spatial locations. Even without a 3D map, if there are a sufficient number of measurements, then values for other, untested spatial locations may be predicted. For instance, if data values are available from several different paths taken by the mobile device around a room, then the mobile device can predict data values for other points in the room. For certain example implementations, one or more entries an antenna configuration data structure may have an indicator that a value is predicted, an indicator that a value has a particular level of reliability, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. 
     In some variants, network-side actors may acquire, build, create, maintain, share, or disseminate (or a combination thereof, e.g.) at least a portion of an antenna configuration data structure. Network-side actors may include, by way of example but not limitation, a cloud-based actor, an internet actor, a telecommunications service provider, a telecommunications equipment supplier, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. In some variants, network-side actors may acquire data fully or partially from the mobile device. For certain example implementations, the following data may be received from the mobile device: at least a portion of a physical state, one or more wireless communication parameters that were employed during the existence of the physical state, and corresponding signal quality. Additionally or alternatively, for certain example implementations, the following data may be received from the mobile device: physical state and wireless communication parameters that were employed during the existence of the physical state, and the following data may be received from a counterpart wireless node (such as the base transceiver station): signal quality based on a network-side reception. 
     In some variants, a network-side actor may send to the mobile device or the mobile device may receive from a network-side actor one or more portions of an antenna configuration data structure so as to download a cacheable part thereof. For certain example implementations, a part may be downloaded, or offered for download, based at least partially on any one or more of the following: (a) current spatial location; (b) physical state; (c) predicted spatial location; (d) predicted physical state; (e) device type, make, model, specifications, or combination thereof, etc. (such as memory capability, at least one user setting, or a specific physical antenna array traits, or a combination thereof, etc.); (f) a proximity to a boundary of current cached part (such as including, but not limited to, a consideration of predicted movement toward a boundary thereof); some combination thereof, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. 
     In some variants, a portable wireless node may account for or address environmental factors or concerns pertinent to wireless communication at, e.g., EHF. For certain example implementations, to avoid transmission through a human body, human tissue (such as hand, head, or a combination thereof, e.g.) may be detected using one or more of the following: (a) test beam emanation (such as analyze reflections from test beams), (b) a capacitive sensor (such as of a touchscreen), (c) a proximity detector (such as a light sensor), (d) a pressure sensor (such as determine where finger tips are placed), (e) a sound sensor (such as determine where a user&#39;s mouth is located), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. 
     In some embodiments, a handheld device  1000  or other portable wireless node may interact with another portable wireless node  5300  (configured as an auxiliary relay item in a shoe or hat or other wearable article, e.g.) via a local linkage  5364  (Bluetooth®, e.g.). For certain example implementations, such auxiliary relay items may be engaged or utilized for any one or more of the following reasons: (a) a clearer path to another wireless node (such as to avoid a head or other human tissue or another blocking object), (b) more power availability, (c) more or differently-arranged antenna elements on the auxiliary relay item, (d) a different available frequency or wireless communication standard, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. By way of example only, a portable wireless node may roll over to an auxiliary relay item to relocate transmission power away from a head or if throughput drops where a user is currently holding a portable wireless node. For certain example implementations: (1) a portable wireless node may select between or among one or more auxiliary relay items (such as may determine when it is advisable to fallback to an auxiliary relay item using a protocol for communication between the mobile device and an auxiliary relay item); (2) an auxiliary relay item may be creating/using/updating an antenna configuration data structure in conjunction with or independent of a portable wireless node; (3) a spatial location of a wearable auxiliary relay item may be determine based at least partly on an attachment site to a body part; (4) a system may automatically determine presence/absence or location of wearable auxiliary relay items; (5) searches for suitable antenna configuration parameters by an auxiliary relay item may be constrained by battery power (such as power/battery-related technology described herein with respect to a portable wireless node may be applied to an auxiliary relay item, unless context dictates otherwise); (6) if multiple items are linked so as to enable or merely enhance communication or user functions if they are working together, then one or more of the multiple items may alert (such as visually, audibly, haptically, or a combination thereof, e.g.) if they are separated from each other beyond a threshold distance (such as beyond a range which enables using them together, such as if a user is driving away from a house with one of two interacting components); or some combination thereof. 
     In some variants, technologies described herein may be directly apparent to a user in one or more ways. For certain example implementations, a portable wireless node may offer a user one or more settings: (a) a size of a data structure being cached, (b) a slider or other mechanism to indicate between battery consumption versus signal acquisition or enhancement, (c) a slider or other mechanism to indicate between an acceptable energy radiation level (such as exposure to a body or head portion thereof) versus signal quality or bandwidth throughput, (d) ability to activate/sync/configure an auxiliary relay item (such as input a type), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, a user may indicate a desire to be notified of (such as via at least one setting): (a) a position or orientation option for a portable wireless node that offers improved communication (such as more bandwidth, less power, less interference, lower cost, or a combination thereof, e.g.), (b) an impending signal loss (such as if movement continues along a current direction based on signal degradation or entries in an antenna configuration data structure), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, notifications may be delivered by a portable wireless node to a user audibly, haptically, visually, or a combination thereof, e.g. for indicating a different position/orientation, impending signal loss, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. 
     In some variants, an extremely high frequency (EHF) communication (such as at 30-300 GHz, such as at 60 GHz in accordance with IEEE 802.1 lad) may be conducted by wireless node that is also capable of utilizing other frequency bands or other wireless communication standards. To facilitate such interoperability, a wireless node may determine (i) whether or when to switch to another frequency band or another wireless communication standard or (ii) whether or when to share bandwidth demands with another frequency band or another wireless communication standard. For certain example implementations, other frequency bands may include, but are not limited to, (a) 2.4 GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5 GHz, or a combination thereof, e.g.; (b) 700/800 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHZ, 1700/1900 MHz, 2500 MHz, 2600 MHz, or a combination thereof, e.g.; or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, other wireless communication standards may include, but are not limited to, (a) IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11n, 802.11ac, or a combination thereof, e.g.; (b) GSM/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS/HSPA, LTE, WiMAX; or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, e.g. 
     In some variants, a wireless node  5300  may choose to switch frequency or wireless standard or may choose to share communication across two or more frequencies or wireless standards. For certain example implementations, one or more of a number of factors may be considered for switching versus sharing decisions. First, a wireless node may switch if another frequency band or standard can handle current bandwidth demands while a current one cannot. Second, a wireless node may switch if another frequency band or standard has a lower, or at least no higher, cost. Third, a wireless node may switch if a current frequency is experiencing attenuation but another frequency is likely not to experience the same attenuation (such as if body tissue is currently attenuating a 60 GHz signal, but the mobile device can switch to a lower frequency signal below 10 GHz). Fourth, a wireless node may share bandwidth demands if a current frequency or standard is not providing a sufficiently fast or strong connection, but another frequency or standard has a higher cost or insufficient bandwidth capability to meet current bandwidth demands. Additional or alternative factors for deciding between switching and sharing may be considered. For certain example implementations, one or more of a number of factors may prompt a wireless node to consider sharing or switching. First, a signal quality may drop below a threshold using a current frequency or standard. Second, no group of wireless communication parameters offering superior performance may be determinable by a wireless node via experimentation. Third, no entry in a wireless communication configuration data structure for a current or impending physical state (or set of conditions generally) may be ascertained. Additional or alternative factors for deciding whether to consider switching versus sharing may be incorporated into a wireless node&#39;s automation. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, e.g. 
     In some variants, a coordinated management system may be implemented where multiple wireless nodes occupy a given physical region, with the management system coordinating various signal strengths, antenna directions, polarizations, features, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Coordination may enable a greater number of nodes within or a more efficient use of available spectrum within a given physical region. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, e.g. 
     In some variants, a coordinated management system may be constituted in a centralized or a distributed manner. For a centralized coordinated management system, in accordance with certain example implementations, an access point, the base transceiver station, a mobile switching center, a fixed wireless node, an internet node, a telecom node, or a combination thereof, e.g., may coordinate a number of portable wireless nodes across a single “cell” or multiple cells. For a distributed coordinated management system, in accordance with certain example implementations, two or more portable wireless nodes, separately from or in conjunction with at least one network-infrastructure-based node—such as a fixed wireless node or a telecom node or an internet node, may coordinate their own individual wireless signals. Coordination may be based at least partially on their own sensor readings, including but not limited to received signals, or based at least partially on using coordination-specific data received from or exchanged with other portable wireless nodes or with a fixed wireless nodes, such as the base transceiver station. For a hybrid coordinated management system, in accordance with certain example implementations, there may be some decentralized efforts by portable wireless nodes with overarching efforts by one or more network-infrastructure-based nodes for centralized oversight. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, one or more factors may be separately or jointly considered in conjunction with, or as part of, an analysis to facilitate coordination. First, available frequency bands (in a given region or to a particular portable wireless node) may be considered. Different bands have different amounts or levels of absorption or other loss, dispersion, scattering, reflection, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. By way of example only, 60 GHz typically has more attenuation than 5 GHz. Thus, although 60 GHz generally propagates a relatively shorter distance, it can correspondingly be reused in smaller spaces. At 60 GHz, reflections may enable “bank shots” off of proximate objects. Two devices may determine to perform a bank shot via negotiation, or a centralized coordinator may order them to perform one. Furthermore, devices transmitting at higher frequencies may utilize smaller antenna elements that accommodate their smaller/shorter wavelengths. A physical size of a particular wavelength aperture may generally be smaller at higher frequencies. Relatively smaller devices can therefore implement beamforming at 60 GHz, for example, even if they would be unable to do so at 1800 MHz, or even 5 GHz. Second, governmental restrictions may be considered. In some contexts statutes or regulations may stipulate or require certain transmission maximums or reception capabilities. By way of example only, a signal strength may be limited at particular frequencies. Third, licensing constraints (such as with regard to available frequencies or particular uses thereof) may be considered. Licensing constraints may flow from a governmental entity, from a corporation to the mobile device or mobile device user (such as contractual obligations), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Fourth, different or particular device types in a given physical region that are trying to share spectrum may be considered. For example, “permanent” characteristics may be considered: (a) antenna features (such as beam pattern capabilities, polarization sensitivity, frequency response, impedance, or a combination thereof, e.g.), (b) processing capability, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. As another example, current settings of a device (such as user-established settings, OS-specified settings, app-determined settings, or a combination thereof, e.g.) may be considered: (a) frequency selection from among multiple possible frequencies, (b) signal encoding selection from among multiple possible encoding schemes, (c) user-imposed restraints (such as based on cost, power, battery life, or a combination thereof, e.g.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. As yet another example, current status levels or conditions of a device may be considered: (a) signal to noise ratio (SNR), (b) signal strength, (c) power constraints or battery status, (d) available processing bandwidth, (e) location, (f) expected radio activity level (such as whether an activity is anticipated to be data intensive (e.g. media streaming)), (g) orientation, (h) operating state (such as connected to a Wi-Fi network or not, access through near field communication (NFC), or a combination thereof, e.g.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Fifth, environmental characteristics may be considered. For example, physical barriers (such as walls, trees, billboards, etc.; those obtainable from one or more Google Earth or crowd-sourced 3D building data or other maps  2330 ; or a combination thereof; etc.) may be considered. Other environmental characteristics may include, but are not limited to, other approaching devices (such as their locations or transmitting characteristics), humidity, temperature, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, coordination opportunities may include, but are not limited to, bank shots or beamforming. First, bank shots may be planned or implemented between at least two wireless nodes to avoid a wall or other obstacle, if a vehicle is detected to be approaching and will be temporarily block a line-of-sight transmission path, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Second, beamforming may be achieved with, by way of example but not limitation, an antenna with multiple elements, a phased array, a meta-material antenna, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. An aimed beam may reach a target with less relative power (such as in comparison to an omnidirectional transmission a beam may reach a further distance (with a narrower footprint) using a same power level). Further with respect to coordination, an omnidirectional transmission may be used if a target or counterpart wireless node is moving (or if a transmitting node is moving), but beamforming may be used if a target is stationary (or slowly moving) (or if a transmitting node is not moving). Aiming a beam may be accomplished through “trial and error”. As a first example, multiple beams may be sent out (such as fully or partially simultaneously or over time) with different indicators, and an intended recipient may be asked for an indicator that they received strongest to determine a good beam pattern for that recipient. As a second example, two nodes may send out beams until they connect. As a third example, a wireless node may sweep beams circularly until a directional angle (such as azimuth angle) is discovered that makes contact with an intended wireless target, and a wireless node may then slice up or down until it hones in to find an elevation or a zenith angle. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc. 
     In some variants, at least one sensor  5302  may sense, produce, or otherwise provide one or more sensor values  4321 ,  4322  (as a series of estimates or other digital signal  4430 , e.g.). Sensors  5302  may include, by way of example only, a camera, a microphone, an accelerometer, a thermometer, a satellite positioning system (SPS) sensor, a barometer, a humidity sensor, a compass, an altimeter, a gyroscope, a magnetometer, a pressure sensor, an oscillation detector, a light sensor, an inertial measurement unit (IMU), a tactile sensor, a touch sensor, a flexibility sensor, a microelectromechanical system (MEMS), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Values provided by at least one sensor  5302  may include, by way of example but not limitation, an image/video, a sound recording, an acceleration value, a temperature, one or more SPS coordinates, a barometric pressure, a humidity level, a compass direction, an altitude, a gyroscopic value, a magnetic reading, a pressure value, an oscillation value, an ambient light reading, inertial readings, touch detections, finger placements, flex detections, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. 
     In some variants, a user interface  1017  may enable one or more users to interact with portable wireless node  5300 . Interactions between a user and a portable wireless node may relate, by way of example but not limitation: to touch/tactile/feeling/haptic sensory (such as a user may shake, rotate, decline/incline, bend, twist, squeeze, or move a portable wireless node which may be detected by a gyroscope, an accelerometer, a compass, a MEMS, or a combination thereof, etc.; a user may press a button, slide a switch, rotate a knob, etc.; a user may touch a touch-sensitive screen; a device may vibrate; or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these), to sound/hearing/speech sensory (such as a user may speak into a microphone, a device may generate sounds via a speaker, or a combination thereof, e.g.), to sights/vision sensory (such as a device may activate one or more lights, modify an image presented on a display screen, track a user&#39;s head/eye/hand movements, or a combination thereof, e.g.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  3500 , operation  26  may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  931  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain via an antenna  1905  (and via a wireless linkage  995  from configuration unit  980 , e.g.) configuration data (a VHDL expression  2297  or password  2036 , e.g.) establishing a security protocol (manifested as an event-sequencing structure in an FPGA  870 ,  1540 ,  1870  or as a protocol implementation code  1088  executable by CPU  4212 , e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic  910  and media  2010 ,  2210  reside in device  1750  and in which a scripting language is used to generate VHDL expression  2297  or in which a password generation module  986  (resident in a device  1750 ,  1758  of network  1700 , e.g.) is used to generate password  2036 . Also in such variants, operation  29  may be performed by a special-purpose interface module implemented as circuitry  1201  having an event-sequencing structure configured to receive a wireless signal that includes password  2036 . This can occur, for example, in a context in which device  1750  includes event-sequencing logic  1210  and receives the wireless signal from device  2760  (as the “second” device, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation  31  may be performed by a special-purpose registration module implemented as circuitry  1021  having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision  2228  whether or not to provide a network access service  2284  responsive to whether or not access request data in the wireless signal (password  2036 , e.g.) satisfies the security protocol (a watermark or checksum, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation  35  may be performed by a special-purpose allocation module implemented as circuitry  1022  having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  927  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to signal a decision whether or not to provide another network access service  2282 ,  2283  responsive to whether or not access request data from another mobile device  2870  satisfies another security protocol (e.g. controlling access to one or more other services  2282 ,  2283 ). This can occur, for example, in a context in which allocation module  1622  also implements circuitry  1371  having an event-sequencing structure configured to implement a firewall separating two or more network access services  2282 - 2284  provided via a single device  1750 . 
     Referring again to the flow variants of  FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70  described above and in particular to flow  3600 , operation  25  may be performed by a special-purpose aggregation module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry  1372  having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain an indication  1344  of one or more wireless communication services  1331 - 1335  having been provided within zone  2970 . Also in such variants, operation  34  may be performed by a special-purpose response module implemented as circuitry  941  having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes  928  at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to signal a decision  1403  whether or not to indicate the wireless communication service(s) provided within zone  2970  by a device  3160  as a response to an indication  2077  from another device  2910  of the wireless communication service(s) being operative within zone  2970 . 
     The foregoing detailed description has set forth various embodiments of the devices and/or processes via the use of block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples. Insofar as such block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples contain one or more functions and/or operations, it will be understood by those within the art that each function and/or operation within such block diagrams, flowcharts, or examples can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, or virtually any combination thereof. In one embodiment, several portions of the subject matter described herein may be implemented via Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs), digital signal processors (DSPs), or other integrated formats. However, those skilled in the art will recognize that some aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, can be equivalently implemented in integrated circuits, as one or more computer programs running on one or more computers (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof, and that designing the circuitry and/or writing the code for the software and or firmware would be well within the skill of one of skill in the art in light of this disclosure. In addition, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the mechanisms of the subject matter described herein are capable of being distributed as a program product in a variety of forms, and that an illustrative embodiment of the subject matter described herein applies regardless of the particular type of signal bearing medium used to actually carry out the distribution. Examples of a signal bearing medium include, but are not limited to, the following: a recordable type medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk drive, a Compact Disc (CD), a Digital Video Disk (DVD), a digital tape, a computer memory, etc.; and a transmission type medium such as a digital and/or an analog communication medium (e.g., a fiber optic cable, a waveguide, a wired communications link, a wireless communication link (e.g., transmitter, receiver, transmission logic, reception logic, etc.), etc.). 
     While particular aspects of the present subject matter described herein have been shown and described, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, based upon the teachings herein, changes and modifications may be made without departing from the subject matter described herein and its broader aspects and, therefore, the appended claims are to encompass within their scope all such changes and modifications as are within the true spirit and scope of the subject matter described herein. It will be understood by those within the art that, in general, terms used herein, and especially in the appended claims (e.g., bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as “open” terms (e.g., the term “including” should be interpreted as “including but not limited to,” the term “having” should be interpreted as “having at least,” the term “includes” should be interpreted as “includes but is not limited to,” etc.). 
     It will be further understood by those within the art that if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is intended, such an intent will be explicitly recited in the claim, and in the absence of such recitation no such intent is present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain usage of the introductory phrases “at least one” and “one or more” to introduce claim recitations. However, the use of such phrases should not be construed to imply that the introduction of a claim recitation by the indefinite articles “a” or “an” limits any particular claim containing such introduced claim recitation to claims containing only one such recitation, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases “one or more” or “at least one” and indefinite articles such as “a” or “an” (e.g., “a” and/or “an” should typically be interpreted to mean “at least one” or “one or more”); the same holds true for the use of definite articles used to introduce claim recitations. In addition, even if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is explicitly recited, those skilled in the art will recognize that such recitation should typically be interpreted to mean at least the recited number (e.g., the bare recitation of “two recitations,” without other modifiers, typically means at least two recitations, or two or more recitations). 
     Furthermore, in those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, and C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, and C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, or C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, or C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that typically a disjunctive word and/or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, claims, or drawings, should be understood to contemplate the possibilities of including one of the terms, either of the terms, or both terms unless context dictates otherwise. For example, the phrase “A or B” will be typically understood to include the possibilities of “A” or “B” or “A and B.” 
     This application may make reference to one or more trademarks, e.g., a word, letter, symbol, or device adopted by one manufacturer or merchant and used to identify and/or distinguish his or her product from those of others. Trademark names used herein are set forth in such language that makes clear their identity, that distinguishes them from common descriptive nouns, that have fixed and definite meanings, or, in many if not all cases, are accompanied by other specific identification using terms not covered by trademark. In addition, trademark names used herein have meanings that are well-known and defined in the literature, or do not refer to products or compounds for which knowledge of one or more trade secrets is required in order to divine their meaning. All trademarks referenced in this application are the property of their respective owners, and the appearance of one or more trademarks in this application does not diminish or otherwise adversely affect the validity of the one or more trademarks. All trademarks, registered or unregistered, that appear in this application are assumed to include a proper trademark symbol, e.g., the circle R or bracketed capitalization (e.g., [trademark name]), even when such trademark symbol does not explicitly appear next to the trademark. To the extent a trademark is used in a descriptive manner to refer to a product or process, that trademark should be interpreted to represent the corresponding product or process as of the date of the filing of this patent application. 
     With respect to the appended claims, those skilled in the art will appreciate that recited operations therein may generally be performed in any order. Also, although various operational flows are presented in a sequence(s), it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently. Examples of such alternate orderings may include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplemental, simultaneous, reverse, or other variant orderings, unless context dictates otherwise. Furthermore, terms like “responsive to,” “related to,” or other past-tense adjectives are generally not intended to exclude such variants, unless context dictates otherwise. Also in the numbered clauses below, specific combinations of aspects and embodiments are articulated in a shorthand form such that (1) according to respective embodiments, for each instance in which a “component” or other such identifiers appear to be introduced (with “a” or “an,” e.g.) more than once in a given chain of clauses, such designations may either identify the same entity or distinct entities; and (2) what might be called “dependent” clauses below may or may not incorporate, in respective embodiments, the features of “independent” clauses to which they refer or other features described above. 
     Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the foregoing specific exemplary processes and/or devices and/or technologies are representative of more general processes and/or devices and/or technologies taught elsewhere herein, such as in the claims filed herewith and/or elsewhere in the present application. 
     CLAUSES 
     1. (Independent) A communication management system comprising: 
     one or more articles of manufacture including 
     a first transistor-based circuit configured to signal a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has wireless local area network (WLAN) service; and 
     a second transistor-based circuit configured to signal a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. 
     2. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the first mobile device, in which the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service comprises firmware. 
     3. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision by establishing the communication, the communication originating at the second mobile device. 
     4. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to respond to the charge authorization and to an indication of the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to an account associated with the first mobile device.       

     5. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision by including the second decision in a wireless signal. 
     6. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision by establishing the communication, the communication being a telephone call to a user of the first mobile device and to a user of a third mobile device. 
     7. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision by establishing the communication, the communication being a telephone call from a user of the second mobile device. 
     8. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit including one or more fluid sensors configured to detect a fluid level configuration of a data node set manifesting the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. 
     9. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the first mobile device, including a processor; 
     the first transistor-based circuit comprising a first medium containing a first instruction set that when executed by the processor causes a signaling of the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device partly based on the first determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service; and 
     the second transistor-based circuit comprising a second medium containing a second instruction set that when executed by the processor causes a signaling of the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. 
     10. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the first transistor-based circuit including a first electrical node set upon which a first voltage configuration manifests the first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service, the first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service having been received as a wireless transmission from the second mobile device; and 
     the second transistor-based circuit including a second electrical node set upon which a second voltage configuration manifests the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service, the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service having been received as a wireless transmission from the second mobile device. 
     11. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device in which the charge authorization identifies the second mobile device and the communication. 
     12. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device in which the communication is established as a real-time response to the charge authorization having been received from a user at the first mobile device. 
     13. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the first mobile device having a nonvolatile memory, the nonvolatile memory containing an antenna configuration data structure. 
     14. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the first mobile device having a field programmable gate array (FPGA), the FPGA implementing a position estimation module. 
     15. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second mobile device, comprising a rooted communication device. 
     16. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second mobile device, comprising an unlocked communication device. 
     17. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second mobile device configured to use a nominal frequency of at least about 900 MHz and of at most about 2.2 GHz in wireless signal reception but inoperable to perform wireless signal transmission at any frequency between 900 MHz and 2.2 GHz. 
     18. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the first mobile device configured to use a first nominal downlink frequency of at least about 59 GHz and of at most about 64 GHz; and 
     the first mobile device configured to use a second nominal downlink frequency of at least about 2.4 GHz and of at most about 5 GHz. 
     19. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     an integrated circuit (IC) chip, the IC chip having a first portion and a second portion, the first portion of the IC chip being the first transistor-based circuit configured to signal the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device partly based on the first determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first determination whether or not the second mobile device has wireless local area network (WLAN) service, the second portion of the IC chip being the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. 
     20. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a wearable assembly comprising a third mobile device, the wearable assembly configured to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map after a decision whether or not to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of the second mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the second mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. 
     21. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a third transistor-based circuit causing a wireless connectivity map to indicate WLAN service apparently provided within a region or not as a conditional response to an indication from the second mobile device of the WLAN service being operative or not within the region. 
     22. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the first mobile device, configured to generate an audible indication of whether or not the second mobile device is available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication conditionally, partly based on an indication whether or not the second mobile device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval and partly based on an indication of the second mobile device having WLAN service. 
     23. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a third transistor-based circuit, configured to obtain a first location estimate describing a first location of the second mobile device by receiving the first location estimate from the second mobile device; and 
     a fourth transistor-based circuit, configured to obtain first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the second mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate by receiving the first provenance data from the second mobile device. 
     24. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a third transistor-based circuit configured to authorize a communication cost component to be posted to an account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device. 
     25. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a third transistor-based circuit configured to cause the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map visibly. 
     26. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a third transistor-based circuit configured to cause at least some of a wireless connectivity map to be displayed via the second mobile device after a decision whether or not to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of a third mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the third mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. 
     27. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a third transistor-based circuit configured to cause at least some of a wireless connectivity map to be displayed, the wireless connectivity map indicating a service boundary prospectively relating to the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device, the communication being a prospective interpersonal communication. 
     28. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     a third mobile device being a wearable assembly configured to present an audible notification of a WLAN service boundary, the WLAN service boundary being a component of a wireless connectivity map after a decision whether or not to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of a fourth mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the fourth mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. 
     29. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to adjust a latency threshold for user data used at the second mobile device.       

     30. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to compare a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold used at the second mobile device.       

     31. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry causing the second mobile device to present some of a wireless connectivity map comprising a specific positional model that represents both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator.       

     32. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to display via a third mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     33. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to display via the second mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     34. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the handheld device, the handheld device being the first mobile device.       

     35. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in the first mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the first mobile device.       

     36. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in the first mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a control component of the wireless signal.       

     37. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause first content of a wireless signal to pass either through a first memory of the first mobile device or through a second memory of the first mobile device selected as an automatic and conditional response to whether or not second content of the wireless signal satisfies a first criterion.       

     38. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and   transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the first data queue crossing a volume threshold.       

     39. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and   transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the first mobile device.       

     40. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and   transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the first mobile device.       

     41. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to hand off an interpersonal communication from a cellular base station to a WLAN access point, a usage of the cellular base station resulting in a communication cost component to an account associated with the first mobile device, the interpersonal communication being bidirectional and being the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     42. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to authorize a communication cost component to be posted to a user account conditionally, at least partly based on a portion of the communication using WLAN access, the user account being associated with the first mobile device.       

     43. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to hand off an interpersonal communication from a WLAN access point to a cellular base station, a usage of the cellular base station resulting in a communication cost component being posted to an account associated with the first mobile device, the interpersonal communication including the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     44. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to cause the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map that includes automatically curated map data.       

     45. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to establish a conference call among several devices as the communication, the several devices including the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     46. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device responsive to receiving the charge authorization from a user of a third device.       

     47. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to assign a cost component of the communication to an account associated with a third mobile device conditionally, in response to receiving the charge authorization from the third mobile device before receiving any charge authorization from the first mobile device.       

     48. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         transistor-based circuitry configured to manifest the communication by establishing a direct wireless linkage between a cell tower and the second mobile device partly based on receiving the charge authorization and partly based on the second mobile device not having WLAN service.       

     49. (Independent) A communication management method comprising: 
     signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has wireless local area network (WLAN) service; and 
     invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. 
     50. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         signaling a decision whether or not to adjust a latency threshold for user data used at the second mobile device.       

     51. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         comparing a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold used at the second mobile device.       

     52. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing the second mobile device to present some of a wireless connectivity map comprising a specific positional model that represents both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator.       

     53. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         displaying via a third mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     54. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         displaying via the second mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     55. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the handheld device, the handheld device being the first mobile device.       

     56. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in the first mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the first mobile device.       

     57. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in the first mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a control component of the wireless signal.       

     58. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing first content of a wireless signal to pass either through a first memory of the first mobile device or through a second memory of the first mobile device selected as an automatic and conditional response to whether or not second content of the wireless signal satisfies a first criterion.       

     59. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and   signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the first data queue crossing a volume threshold.       

     60. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and   signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the first mobile device.       

     61. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and   signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the first mobile device.       

     62. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a handoff of an interpersonal communication from a cellular base station to a WLAN access point, a usage of the cellular base station resulting in a communication cost component to an account associated with the first mobile device, the interpersonal communication being bidirectional and being the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     63. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         authorizing a communication cost component to be posted to a user account conditionally, at least partly based on a portion of the communication using WLAN access, the user account being associated with the first mobile device.       

     64. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing a handoff of an interpersonal communication from a WLAN access point to a cellular base station, a usage of the cellular base station resulting in a communication cost component being posted to an account associated with the first mobile device, the interpersonal communication including the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     65. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map that includes automatically curated map data.       

     66. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         establishing a conference call among several devices as the communication, the several devices including the first mobile device and the second mobile device.       

     67. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         establishing the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device responsive to receiving the charge authorization from a user of a third device.       

     68. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         causing an assignment of a cost component of the communication to an account associated with a third mobile device conditionally, in response to receiving the charge authorization from the third mobile device before receiving any charge authorization from the first mobile device.       

     69. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising: 
     the invoking transistor-based circuitry configured to signal the second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally partly based on the second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on the second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service including
         manifesting the communication by establishing a direct wireless linkage between a cell tower and the second mobile device partly based on receiving the charge authorization and partly based on the second mobile device not having WLAN service.       

     70. (Independent) A communication management method comprising: 
     obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; and 
     responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. 
     71. The communication management method of CLAUSE 70 further comprising: 
     performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 49. 
     72. (Independent) A communication management method comprising: 
     obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data; 
     obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device; and 
     signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. 
     73. The communication management method of CLAUSE 72 further comprising: 
     performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 49. 
     74. (Independent) A communication management method comprising: 
     obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; and 
     responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. 
     75. The communication management method of CLAUSE 74 further comprising: 
     performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 49. 
     76. (Independent) A communication management method comprising: 
     obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device; 
     obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device; and 
     signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. 
     77. The communication management method of CLAUSE 76 further comprising: 
     performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 49. 
     78. (Independent) A communication management method comprising: 
     obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device; 
     obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate; and 
     signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. 
     79. The communication management method of CLAUSE 78 further comprising: 
     performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 49. 
     80. (Independent) A system comprising: 
     means for performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES. 
     81. (Independent) An article of manufacture comprising: 
     one or more physical media configured to bear a device-detectable implementation of a method including at least 
     signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has wireless local area network (WLAN) service; and 
     signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. 
     82. The article of manufacture of CLAUSE 81 in which a portion of the one or more physical media comprises: 
     one or more signal-bearing media configured to transmit a binary sequence manifesting one or more device-executable instructions configured to perform the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES. 
     83. (Independent) An article of manufacture comprising: 
     one or more physical media bearing a device-detectable output manifesting an occurrence of 
     signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has wireless local area network (WLAN) service; and 
     signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. 
     84. The article of manufacture of CLAUSE 83 in which a portion of the one or more physical media comprises: 
     one or more signal-bearing media bearing at least one binary sequence from an event-sequencing structure configured to perform the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES. 
     All of the patents and other publications referred to above are incorporated herein by reference generally—including those identified in relation to particular new applications of existing techniques—to the extent not inconsistent herewith (in each respective latest edition, where applicable). While various system, method, article of manufacture, or other embodiments or aspects have been disclosed above, also, other combinations of embodiments or aspects will be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of the above disclosure. The various embodiments and aspects disclosed above are for purposes of illustration and are not intended to be limiting, with the true scope and spirit being indicated in the final claim set that follows.